800xA for MOD 300 6.0 Operation

800xA for MOD 300 6.0 Operation
800xA for MOD 300
Operation
System Version 6.0
Power and productivity
for a better world
TM
800xA for MOD 300
Operation
System Version 6.0
NOTICE
This document contains information about one or more ABB products and may include a description
of or a reference to one or more standards that may be generally relevant to the ABB products. The
presence of any such description of a standard or reference to a standard is not a representation that
all of the ABB products referenced in this document support all of the features of the described or referenced standard. In order to determine the specific features supported by a particular ABB product,
the reader should consult the product specifications for the particular ABB product.
ABB may have one or more patents or pending patent applications protecting the intellectual property
in the ABB products described in this document.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as
a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.
Products described or referenced in this document are designed to be connected, and to communicate
information and data via a secure network. It is the sole responsibility of the system/product owner to
provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between the product and the system network
and/or any other networks that may be connected.
The system/product owners must establish and maintain appropriate measures, including, but not limited to, the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, and so on, to protect the system, its products and networks, against security
breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage, and/or theft of data or information.
ABB verifies the function of released products and updates. However system/product owners are ultimately responsible to ensure that any system update (including but not limited to code changes, configuration file changes, third-party software updates or patches, hardware change out, and so on) is
compatible with the security measures implemented. The system/product owners must verify that the
system and associated products function as expected in the environment they are deployed.
In no event shall ABB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any
nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of any software or hardware described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from
ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used,
copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license. This product meets the requirements specified in EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and in Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
TRADEMARKS
All rights to copyrights, registered trademarks, and trademarks reside with their respective owners.
Copyright © 2003-2016 by ABB.
All rights reserved.
Release:
Document number:
September 2016
3BUR002418-600 A
Table of Contents
About This User Manual
User Manual Conventions ...............................................................................................15
Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons................................................................16
Terminology.....................................................................................................................17
Released User Manuals and Release Notes.....................................................................18
Section 1 - Introduction
Document Overview ........................................................................................................19
Product Overview ............................................................................................................21
Section 2 - Getting Started
General ............................................................................................................................23
Operating Overview.........................................................................................................25
Accessing Displays..........................................................................................................25
Printing Displays .............................................................................................................30
Alarm/Event Handling.....................................................................................................30
Section 3 - CCF Displays
Loop Detail Displays .......................................................................................................32
Control and PID Loops ........................................................................................32
Device Loops........................................................................................................36
Continuous Loops ................................................................................................38
Loop Faceplates...............................................................................................................39
Tag Identification and Indicators..........................................................................39
Process Bar Graphs and Values............................................................................40
Operator Controls.................................................................................................42
3BUR002418-600 A
5
Table of Contents
Tool Tips ............................................................................................................ 45
Loop FCM Display ......................................................................................................... 45
Operating Procedures for CCF Displays......................................................................... 46
Viewing Trend Data ............................................................................................. 47
Taking Control of a Loop..................................................................................... 49
Changing Control Parameters .............................................................................. 49
Tuning/Engineering Procedures for CCF Displays......................................................... 51
Tuning Via the Loop Detail Display .................................................................... 51
Engineer Tuning Displays for a Continuous Loop .............................................. 53
Engineer Tuning Displays for a Device Loop...................................................... 57
Alarms ............................................................................................................................. 58
Alarm Post and Alarm Check .............................................................................. 58
Alarm Detection................................................................................................... 59
Alarm Indication and Viewing............................................................................. 59
Alarm Priority ...................................................................................................... 60
Alarm Limits and Limiting .................................................................................. 60
Alarm Acknowledgement .................................................................................... 61
MOD Group Displays ..................................................................................................... 62
Group Status Display ........................................................................................... 62
Group Trend Display ........................................................................................... 66
Group Graphic Display ........................................................................................ 68
Group Alarm Display........................................................................................... 69
MOD Area Displays........................................................................................................ 69
Area Status Display ............................................................................................. 69
Area Alarm Display ............................................................................................. 71
Area Graphic Display .......................................................................................... 72
Section 4 - TCL Displays
Displays for Sequence and Recipe Development............................................................ 76
TCL Version Mismatch Warning .................................................................................... 76
TCL / Unit Message Display........................................................................................... 77
TCL Message Display Format ............................................................................. 77
Acknowledge and Respond to a Message............................................................ 77
6
3BUR002418-600 A
Table of Contents
Unit Overview Display ....................................................................................................78
Unit Detail Display..........................................................................................................80
Unit Detail Display Format ..................................................................................80
Loading the Sequence from the Unit Detail Display ...........................................81
Loading a Recipe from the Unit Detail Display...................................................82
Changing Sequence State, Mode, and Status .......................................................82
Sequence Detail Display..................................................................................................84
Sequence Detail Display Format..........................................................................85
Choosing a Sequence for Sequence Detail...........................................................85
Changing Sequence State, Mode, and Status .......................................................85
Manipulating Sequence Steps ..............................................................................85
SFC (Sequential Function Chart) Display .......................................................................86
SFC Display Format.............................................................................................87
SFC Display Operation ........................................................................................88
Sequence Debug Display.................................................................................................91
Sequence Debug Display Format .........................................................................91
Choosing a Sequence for Debug Display.............................................................92
Sequence Source ..................................................................................................92
Changing Sequence State, Mode, and Status .......................................................92
Sequence Debug Program Functions ...................................................................92
Recipe Detail ...................................................................................................................97
Recipe Detail Display Format ..............................................................................97
Changing Recipe Values ......................................................................................98
TCL Array Plot Display ..................................................................................................98
TCL Array Plot Format ........................................................................................98
Using TCL Array Plot ..........................................................................................98
Batch Connectivity to M0D 300....................................................................................101
Section 5 - TLL Displays
Segment Display............................................................................................................103
Segment Display Fields and Buttons .................................................................105
Faceplates for Program Elements.......................................................................106
Register Display ............................................................................................................108
3BUR002418-600 A
7
Table of Contents
Register Faceplate ......................................................................................................... 109
Counter Display ............................................................................................................ 110
Counter Faceplate.......................................................................................................... 111
Timer Display................................................................................................................ 112
Timer Faceplate ............................................................................................................. 114
I/O Point Display........................................................................................................... 115
I/O Point Faceplate........................................................................................................ 115
File Display ................................................................................................................... 117
Sequencer Display......................................................................................................... 118
TLL Device Logged Changes ....................................................................................... 119
TLL Messages ............................................................................................................... 119
Section 6 - Status Displays
System Status Display................................................................................................... 122
Subsystem Status Displays............................................................................................ 124
AC460 Subsystem Status Display...................................................................... 125
AC410 Subsystem Status Display...................................................................... 130
Controller Node Subsystem Status Display....................................................... 131
Turbo/Console Node Subsystem Status Display ............................................... 137
Diagnostic Message Display ......................................................................................... 140
System Performance Display ........................................................................................ 145
Section 7 - I/O Displays
S800 I/O Displays ......................................................................................................... 148
S800 LAN Display............................................................................................. 148
S800 Station Display ......................................................................................... 152
S800 Device Display.......................................................................................... 156
S800 Warmstart.................................................................................................. 159
S100 I/O Displays ......................................................................................................... 161
S100 LAN Display............................................................................................. 161
S100 Device Status Display............................................................................... 163
Smoothstart Start-up Sequence .......................................................................... 165
S100 Warmstart.................................................................................................. 165
8
3BUR002418-600 A
Table of Contents
PROFIBUS Displays .....................................................................................................167
PROFIBUS LAN Display ..................................................................................168
PROFIBUS Device Display ...............................................................................171
Module/Channel Display ...................................................................................176
Startup
...........................................................................................................178
TRIO Displays...............................................................................................................179
Accessing the Remote I/O Displays for a SC Controller ...................................179
Accessing the Remote I/O Displays for an AC Controller ................................179
TRIO LAN Display............................................................................................180
TRIO Block Display ..........................................................................................185
Direct I/O Displays........................................................................................................189
Direct I/O Block Header Area............................................................................191
Direct I/O Area...................................................................................................191
Section 8 - Operation Examples
Selecting and Viewing a Control Loop..........................................................................194
Single Loop Operation in Automatic Mode ..................................................................196
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Local Setpoint.....................................196
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Remote Setpoint .................................197
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Ratio and Bias.....................................198
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Feedforward........................................199
Single Loop Auto/Manual Transfer...............................................................................201
Transfer from Manual to Automatic ..................................................................201
Transfer from Automatic to Manual ..................................................................203
Single Loop Operation in Manual Mode.......................................................................204
Cascade Operation.........................................................................................................205
Cascade Operation in Manual ............................................................................205
Cascade Operation in Auto ................................................................................206
Viewing Alarms on MOD Loop Displays .....................................................................208
Viewing Abnormal State on MOD Loop Displays........................................................211
Appendix A - Runtime Templates
Introduction ...................................................................................................................213
3BUR002418-600 A
9
Table of Contents
Loop Definition Templet .............................................................................................. 213
Device Loop Templet .................................................................................................... 221
PID Controller FCM ..................................................................................................... 231
Adaptive Gain................................................................................................................ 245
Adaptive Reset .............................................................................................................. 249
Auto/Manual Controller FCM....................................................................................... 250
Input FCMs ................................................................................................................... 251
Common Fields.................................................................................................. 251
Analog Input FCM............................................................................................. 251
Digital Input FCM ............................................................................................. 252
Pulsed Input FCM .............................................................................................. 252
Pulsed Input Time Derivative FCM ................................................................... 252
Output FCMs................................................................................................................. 253
Common Fields.................................................................................................. 253
Analog Output FCM .......................................................................................... 254
Digital Output FCM........................................................................................... 255
Pulse Duration Output FCM .............................................................................. 255
Pulse Train Output FCM.................................................................................... 255
Common Calculator FCM Fields .................................................................................. 256
Math Related Calculator FCMs .................................................................................... 256
Sum of 4 Inputs FCM ........................................................................................ 257
Polynomial FCM................................................................................................ 257
Average FCM..................................................................................................... 257
Subtraction FCM................................................................................................ 258
Division FCM .................................................................................................... 258
Natural Logarithm FCM .................................................................................... 258
Exponentiation FCM.......................................................................................... 258
Multiplication FCM ........................................................................................... 258
Absolute Value FCM ......................................................................................... 259
Scale Compensation Calculator FCMs ......................................................................... 259
Modified Square Root FCM .............................................................................. 259
Linearization FCM............................................................................................. 260
10
3BUR002418-600 A
Table of Contents
Normalize FCM .................................................................................................260
Inverse Normalize FCM .....................................................................................261
Scale Input FCM ................................................................................................261
Flow Calculation FCM.......................................................................................262
Temperature Compensation FCM ......................................................................263
Ratio/Bias FCM .................................................................................................263
Time Related Calculator FCMs .....................................................................................264
Time Derivative FCM.........................................................................................264
Time Integration FCM........................................................................................265
First Order Filter FCM .......................................................................................265
Totalizer FCM ....................................................................................................265
Lead/Lag Filter FCM .........................................................................................266
Dead Time FCM.................................................................................................266
Dead Time Compensation FCM.........................................................................267
Timer FCM.........................................................................................................267
Counter FCM .....................................................................................................267
Delay Timer FCM ..............................................................................................268
Logic Calculator FCMs .................................................................................................269
Logical AND ......................................................................................................269
Logical OR .........................................................................................................270
Logical NOT.......................................................................................................271
Exclusive OR......................................................................................................271
Set/Reset Flip-Flop.............................................................................................271
Real Compare FCM ...........................................................................................272
Miscellaneous Calculator FCMs ...................................................................................273
Selector FCM .....................................................................................................273
Put Generic Value FCM .....................................................................................274
Get Generic Value FCM.....................................................................................274
Select Next .........................................................................................................276
Redundant Signal Selector .................................................................................276
Input Limiter FCM.............................................................................................277
User Calculations FCM......................................................................................277
3BUR002418-600 A
11
Table of Contents
Data Entry FCM................................................................................................. 278
String FCM ........................................................................................................ 278
User Math Block FCM ...................................................................................... 278
MOD30_MOD300_MAP .................................................................................. 279
Extended Processing FCM ............................................................................................ 280
Common Fields.................................................................................................. 280
Continuous Moving Average FCM.................................................................... 281
Standard Deviation FCM ................................................................................... 282
Non-Rate Periodic Total FCM ........................................................................... 282
Periodic Average FCM....................................................................................... 282
Periodic Maximum FCM ................................................................................... 282
Periodic Minimum FCM.................................................................................... 282
Periodic Rate Total FCM ................................................................................... 283
S800 I/O Runtime Templets.......................................................................................... 283
AI810, AI890 ..................................................................................................... 283
AI820
.......................................................................................................... 286
AI830
.......................................................................................................... 289
AI835
.......................................................................................................... 292
AO810, AO890 .................................................................................................. 295
AO820
.......................................................................................................... 298
DI810
.......................................................................................................... 301
DI814
.......................................................................................................... 304
DI820
.......................................................................................................... 305
DI821
.......................................................................................................... 307
DO810
.......................................................................................................... 309
DO814
.......................................................................................................... 313
DO820
.......................................................................................................... 315
Special Applications Runtime Templets ....................................................................... 318
SP_ALGO1_FCM ............................................................................................. 318
SP_ALGO2_FCM ............................................................................................. 318
SP_ALGO3_FCM ............................................................................................. 318
SP_ALGO4_FCM ............................................................................................. 318
12
3BUR002418-600 A
Table of Contents
SP_ALGO5_FCM..............................................................................................318
BRKPTS ........................................................................................................................319
Revision History
Updates in Revision Index A.........................................................................................321
Index
3BUR002418-600 A
13
Table of Contents
14
3BUR002418-600 A
About This User Manual
Any security measures described in this user manual, for example, for user
access, password security, network security, firewalls, virus protection, etc.,
represent possible steps that a user of an 800xA System may want to consider
based on a risk assessment for a particular application and installation. This risk
assessment, as well as the proper implementation, configuration, installation,
operation, administration, and maintenance of all relevant security related
equipment, software, and procedures, are the responsibility of the user of the
800xA System.
This user manual describes how to operate 800xA for MOD 300 software. MOD
300 integration software provides standard display formats on the 800xA System
that are similar in features and functions to the Multibus based MOD 300 and Unix
based Advant OCS systems.
User Manual Conventions
Microsoft Windows conventions are normally used for the standard presentation of
material when entering text, key sequences, prompts, messages, menu items, screen
elements, etc.
3BUR002418-600 A
15
Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons
About This User Manual
Warning, Caution, Information, and Tip Icons
This user manual includes Warning, Caution, and Information where appropriate to
point out safety related or other important information. It also includes Tip to point
out useful hints to the reader. The corresponding symbols should be interpreted as
follows:
Electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard that could result in
electrical shock.
Warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard that could result in personal
injury.
Caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept
discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard that could result
in corruption of software or damage to equipment/property.
Information icon alerts the reader to pertinent facts and conditions.
Tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to
use a certain function
Although Warning hazards are related to personal injury, and Caution hazards are
associated with equipment or property damage, it should be understood that
operation of damaged equipment could, under certain operational conditions, result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,
fully comply with all Warning and Caution notices.
16
3BUR002418-600 A
About This User Manual
Terminology
Terminology
A complete and comprehensive list of terms is included in System 800xA System
Guide Functional Description (3BSE038018*). The listing includes terms and
definitions that apply to the 800xA System where the usage is different from
commonly accepted industry standard definitions and definitions given in standard
dictionaries such as Webster’s Dictionary of Computer Terms. Terms that uniquely
apply to this User Manual are listed in the following table:
Term
Description
AC410, AC460
Advant Controller 410 and 460
AdvaBuild
Configuration package for Advant OCS running on an
Engineering Station (HP-UX or Windows)
Advant OCS
Advant Open Control System or MOD control system
CCF
Configurable Control Functions.
DCN
Distributed Communication Network. Connects MOD
control system nodes.
FCM
Function Class Module
Node level MOD
connections
CNTRLLER, CONSOLE, GENERICD, AC410,
AC460MOD, BUC, DCN_DCN, ADVANT_D2D
TCL
Taylor Control Language (MOD sequence control)
TLL
Taylor Ladder Logic
TRIO
Taylor Remote I/O
3BUR002418-600 A
17
Released User Manuals and Release Notes
About This User Manual
Released User Manuals and Release Notes
A complete list of all User Manuals and Release Notes applicable to System 800xA
is provided in System 800xA Released User Manuals and Release Notes
(3BUA000263*).
System 800xA Released User Manuals and Release Notes (3BUA000263*) is
updated each time a document is updated or a new document is released. It is in pdf
format and is provided in the following ways:
•
Included on the documentation media provided with the system and published
to ABB SolutionsBank when released as part of a major or minor release,
Service Pack, Feature Pack, or System Revision.
•
Published to ABB SolutionsBank when a User Manual or Release Note is
updated in between any of the release cycles listed in the first bullet.
A product bulletin is published each time System 800xA Released User Manuals
and Release Notes (3BUA000263*) is updated and published to ABB
SolutionsBank.
18
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 1 Introduction
Document Overview
This user manual describes how to use 800xA for MOD 300 software for MOD 300
system operation. The 800xA System provides a common operation and
configuration view for MOD 300 and other field devices and software options. This
user manual has the following objectives:
•
How to use 800xA for MOD 300 displays and faceplates.
•
Operating examples.
•
Provide additional reference information as necessary.
Intended User
As a prerequisite you should already be familiar with the MOD 300 control system
you will be working with. In addition, you must have operator privileges on the
computer where the software runs. This user manual is not intended to be the sole
source of instruction for the software. It is highly recommended that those people
who will be involved in system operation attend the applicable training courses
offered by ABB.
The following are some quick guidelines to help you find what you are looking for
in this user manual.
Where to Start
Refer to Section 2, Getting Started for instructions on starting 800xA for MOD 300
software and some basic operations within the 800xA operations framework.
3BUR002418-600 A
19
Document Overview
Section 1 Introduction
Operation
Refer to the following operation chapters for instructions and reference information
related to runtime operation. Specifically, these chapters provide a detailed
description of each display related to runtime operation:
•
Section 3, CCF Displays.
•
Section 4, TCL Displays.
•
Section 5, TLL Displays.
Diagnostic Displays
Section 6, Status Displays contains information associated with using the diagnostic
and status displays.
I/O Displays
Section 7, I/O Displays contains information associated with using the I/O displays.
Operation Examples
Section 8, Operation Examples contains information intended to help the user better
understand how to use the displays.
Online Help
Comprehensive online help is available for the software. Access to the complete
help files is available via the Help menu in the main menu bar. Context-sensitive
help (F1) is available for some windows.
20
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 1 Introduction
Product Overview
Product Overview
800xA for MOD 300 is an integration product to the 800xA System for the MOD
300 control network (DCN). The Connectivity Server, with an external RTA Unit
connects to the DCN and gathers data for display as different MOD Aspect Objects
on Client Workstations.
The system offers features and functions designed to facilitate and optimize any
process or enterprise. Information is presented in an intuitive form using standard
display aspects similar in features and functions to the Unix and Multibus based
Advant OCS system. Customized user accounts allow operators to deal with
operating conditions in a productive manner.
The interface used allows multiple aspects of objects to be viewed in a format that is
familiar to users. Operation of the control system works within this interface to give
you the ability to easily explore Aspect Objects, control loops, acknowledge
abnormal conditions and perform many other activities necessary to monitor and
control a process.
The MOD 300 display aspects are:
•
•
3BUR002418-600 A
System and Status
–
MOD 300 System Status.
–
MOD 300 AC410 CPS Status.
–
MOD 300 AC460 CPS Status.
–
MOD 300 Controller Subsystem.
–
MOD 300 Multibus.
–
MOD 300 Message.
–
MOD 300 System Performance.
–
MOD 300 Alarm Summary.
CCF
–
MOD 300 Loop Detail.
–
MOD 300 Loop FCM.
–
MOD 300 Environment Area Graphic.
21
Product Overview
•
•
22
Section 1 Introduction
–
MOD 300 Environment Area Status.
–
MOD 300 Environment Group Graphic.
–
MOD 300 Environment Group Status.
–
MOD 300 Environment Group Trend.
TCL
–
MOD 300 TCL Unit Overview.
–
MOD 300 TCL Unit Detail.
–
MOD 300 TCL Recipe Detail.
–
MOD 300 TCL Sequence Debug.
–
MOD 300 TCL Sequence Detail.
–
MOD 300 TCL SFC.
–
MOD 300 TCL Unit Array Plot.
TLL
–
MOD 300 TLL Counter.
–
MOD 300 TLL Counter Faceplate.
–
MOD 300 TLL File.
–
MOD 300 TLL I/O Point.
–
MOD 300 TLL I/O Point Faceplate.
–
MOD 300 TLL Register.
–
MOD 300 TLL Register Faceplate.
–
MOD 300 TLL Segment.
–
MOD 300 TLL Sequencer.
–
MOD 300 TLL Timer.
–
MOD 300 TLL Timer Faceplate.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 2 Getting Started
General
Installation information for the base product and for the displays described in this
user manual is in System 800xA Manual Installation (3BSE034678*).
Configuration information for the base product is in System 800xA Configuration
(3BDS011222*). Configuration of the displays described in this user manual is in
800xA for MOD 300 Configuration (3BUR002417*).
Start-up Procedure
Start the workplace as follows:
1.
Turn on your computer and wait for the logon screen.
2.
Select your operator user name, type the password, and then select the blue
arrow.
Your status changes to the User Rights as defined in the User Manager and you
are now logged into the computer.
3.
From the ABB Start Menu, select ABB Industrial IT 800xA > System > and
then select Workplace.
The desktop will be shown and the Workplace Login is launched. Start the
Plant Explorer or Operator Workplace to access the MOD 300 displays.
Product Verification
With the workplace started, select the About Industrial IT icon
. The About
screen identifies the version of the installed products and extensions.
3BUR002418-600 A
23
General
Section 2 Getting Started
Log on as a Different User
The workplace uses Windows administration rights as the basis for its security
system. Operators have specific rights necessary to start and use the workplace. The
user rights associated with your logon name and password determines your security
level.
To log into the client station as an operator:
1.
On the Windows Start Menu, select the user name in the upper right hand
corner, and then click Sign Out in the pop-up menu.
2.
Press Ctrl+Alt+Del and choose the operator user.
3.
Type the password and click the blue arrow.
Your status changes to the User Rights as defined in the User Manager and you
are now logged in to the client station.
The Log Over function enables a fast and temporary switch between users in a
running workplace. The log over changes the permissions and user roles but keeps
all open windows with their present contents. The permitted actions in the open
windows are controlled by the permissions of the logged over user. The log over
only affects the 800xA System permission. Windows security is still the same as the
user logged in.
To log over into the 800xA System as a new user:
1.
Right click on the user name in bottom line of your workplace window and
select Change User. A Change-user authentication dialog box appears.
If MOD specific displays are open, a Close View window will appear and the
listed MOD 300 displays must be closed before the user can be logged over.
24
2.
Type your User ID with domain and password. If accepted, the dialog box
disappears and the new user can operate the workplace.
3.
To return to the first user right click on the user name again and select Revert
User. The Revert User operation requires authentication of the user to revert
to.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 2 Getting Started
Operating Overview
Operating Overview
The control packages (CCF, TCL, and TLL) provide automatic control functions
that may or may not involve operator interaction, depending upon the requirements
of each particular application. When operator interaction is required, the operator
interface is supported by the displays described in the following chapters. These
displays are based upon aspects of the object type templets described in 800xA for
MOD 300 Configuration (3BUR002417*). Refer to the System 800xA Operation
(3BSE036904*) user manual for basic topics regarding runtime operation.
The following major functions are supported by the operator interface:
•
Values of parameters from the loops are displayed in numerical and graphic
form
•
Operator can change certain parameter values such as setpoints, outputs,
setpoint modes, output modes, and device commands from the console
•
Display and acknowledgment of alarm conditions
•
Operator can change (tune) some aspects of the configuration while the system
is operating
Accessing Displays
Use the aspect browser, display associations and links to access displays described
in this user manual.
Loop Templet and FCM Templet displays are accessed from the Loop FCM
display. However, these displays are case sensitive to the tag name. If a valid tag
is SC5_3_PID1, entering Sc5_3_PID1 will not access the templet displays.
Accessing Displays Using Browser
The aspect browser, in the form of a tree-type control, is similar to Windows
Explorer and is used to access objects for display. Defined objects in this nested
view are categorized within logical structures. For example, MOD 300 objects get
imported into the Control Structure.
3BUR002418-600 A
25
Accessing Displays
Section 2 Getting Started
Accessing Displays Using Graphic Displays
Graphic displays may be associated with an object with context navigation to trends,
faceplates, and overview type displays. Overview graphics can provide a panoramic
view of the process and can provide one-step access to critical displays. They can be
made the software equivalent of the Page Selector Alarm Panel with the capability
to monitor alarms for different areas and groups from one display or have target
blocks that can initiate a TCL program sequence state or status transition.
Accessing Displays Using Context Menus
Context menus, Figure 1, provide display access based upon the object type or upon
the selection in the current display (for example, access to the Lan Display or
Station Display when working with S800 I/O). Use the right mouse button to get an
applicable context menu. User roles affect the contents of the context menu. Also,
these menus can be filtered to show only the MOD 300 specific aspects.
TLL
TCL
CCF
Tags in Areas/Groups
Figure 1. Context Menus (Typical) for MOD Tag Aspects
26
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 2 Getting Started
Accessing Displays
MOD 300 Objects and Associated Aspects
Table 1 shows the relationships between MOD 300 objects and aspects.
Table 1. MOD 300 Objects and Associated Aspects
MOD 300 Objects
Associated Aspects
MOD_DB
MOD 300 System Status,
Alarm and Event Lists (CCF Alarm, Diagnostic
Message, TCL Message)
MOD_AREA
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_AC460
MOD300 AC460 PS Status,
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_AC460MOD
MOD300 AC460 PS Status, MOD300 Message,
MOD300 System Performance,
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_AC410
MOD300 AC410 PS Status, MOD300 Message,
MOD300 System Performance,
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_CCF
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_CTRL_BLOCK
MOD_CCF_CONTIN_LOOP
MOD300 Alarm Summary, MOD300 Loop Detail,
MOD300 Loop FCM, Faceplate, Alarm List,
Measure_DVAlue
MOD_CCF_CNTRL_LOOP
MOD300 Alarm Summary, MOD300 Loop Detail,
MOD300 Loop FCM, Faceplate, Alarm List,
Measure_DVAlue
Output_DValue
MOD_CCF_PID_LOOP
MOD300 Alarm Summary, MOD300 Loop Detail,
MOD300 Loop FCM, Faceplate, Alarm List,
Measure_DVAlue, Output_DValue,
Setpoint_DValue
3BUR002418-600 A
27
Accessing Displays
Section 2 Getting Started
Table 1. MOD 300 Objects and Associated Aspects (Continued)
MOD 300 Objects
28
Associated Aspects
MOD_CCF_DEV_LOOP
MOD300 Alarm Summary, MOD300 Loop Detail,
MOD300 Loop FCM, Faceplate, Alarm List,
Command_DVAlue
MOD_UNIT
MOD300 TCL, MOD300 Recipe Detail, MOD300
Sequence Debug, MOD300 Sequence Detail,
MOD300 SFC, MOD300 Unit Detail
MOD_SEQUENCE
MOD300 Sequence Debug, MOD300 Sequence
Detail, MOD300 SFC
MOD_LL_DEV
MOD300 TLL, MOD300 Counter, MOD300 File,
MOD300 IOPoint, MOD300 Register, MOD300
Segment, MOD300 Sequencer, MOD300 Timer
MOD_LL_CNTR_GRP,
MOD_LLIO_GRP,
MOD_LL_REG_GRP,
MOD_LL_TIMER_GRP
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_LL_CNTR
MOD300 TLL Counter Faceplate
MOD_LL_I_O
MOD300 TLL IO Point Faceplate
MOD_LL_REG
MOD300 TLL Register Faceplate
MOD_LL_TIMER
MOD300 TLL Timer Faceplate
MOD_D2F,
MOD_ADVANT_STATION
MOD300 Message,
MOD300 System Performance,
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_CONT_SS
MOD300 Controller Subsystem,
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_CONTRLLER,
MOD_BUC
MOD300 Controller Subsystem,
MOD300 Message,
MOD300 System Performance,
MOD 300 System Status
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 2 Getting Started
Accessing Displays
Table 1. MOD 300 Objects and Associated Aspects (Continued)
MOD 300 Objects
Associated Aspects
MOD_BUM
MOD300 Message,
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_CONSOLE,
MOD_ADVANT_D2D,
MOD_DCN_DCN,
MOD_GENERICD
MOD300 Multibus,
MOD300 Message,
MOD300 System Performance,
MOD 300 System Status
MOD_ENV_AREA
MOD300 Area Status, MOD300 Area Graphic,
MOD300 Area Alarm
MOD_ENV_GROUP
MOD300 Group Status, MOD300 Group Graphic,
MOD300 Group Alarm, MOD300 Group Trend
Availability of Displays as Indicated by Server Status
The top right corner of each MOD display has one or two (redundancy) indicators
that show the server status between the client/server and the server/controller. These
indicators show the status conditions as described in Table 2. An overview display
with multiple controllers will not go yellow unless all nodes are down.
Table 2. Server Status Indicators
Condition
Indication
Description
OK
Green
Connection between client/server is good.
Failed
Red
A connection was made but is not working.
Not Connected
White
No connection made between client/server.
Trying
Blue
Attempting a connection between client/server.
Node Down
Yellow
The server/controller connection has failed. The
controller node may be down.
3BUR002418-600 A
29
Printing Displays
Section 2 Getting Started
Printing Displays
To print the active window of a display, use the Print Screen key to capture the
screen, paste the image into an application such as Microsoft Word and then send it
to the printer. For best resolution, maximize detail displays to full screen before
printing.
By default, the MOD Environment Group Trend, Group Status, Group Graphic and
Area Status print in the landscape mode for best orientation.
Alarm/Event Handling
When rebooting a Connectivity Server node pair where MOD 300
messages/events are routed, wait until the primary Connectivity Server node is
fully booted and active before rebooting the standby Connectivity Server node to
prevent an alarm mismatch.
MOD 300 has multiple alarm conditions per object (Measure, Setpoint, Output,
Deviation and so forth). To handle these properties, a MOD Alarm/Event List is
provided as an aspect. Alarm/Events are handled as follows.
Alarm/Event types with user action (acknowledgement):
•
CCF (Measure, Setpoint, Output, Deviation, Device).
•
TCL (Message, Reply, Error, Unit Alarm).
•
Diagnostics.
•
User Ack (outgoing).
•
TCL Reply (outgoing).
•
Global Ack broadcast (incoming).
•
Global Ack broadcast (outgoing).
Event types with no user action required (for history/loggers only):
30
•
Parameter Change (incoming) - NOTE: Parameter change messages for
template and faceplate changes always come through as Administrator.
•
User Log On/Off (incoming).
•
User Ack (incoming).
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Operational Displays for Configurable Control Functions
The format and functionality of each runtime display that supports the Configurable
Control Functions (CCF) is described here along with procedures for basic
operations that are executed from the displays. In addition, tuning and engineering
procedures are described. The runtime displays that support CCF are:
•
Loop Detail.
•
Loop Faceplate.
•
Loop FCM.
•
Loop Templets (Appendix A, Runtime Templates).
•
Area Displays (Alarm, Status, and Graphic).
•
Group Displays (Trend, Alarm, Status, and Graphic).
These basic operational displays are supported by runtime versions of the Loop
Definition and FCM Templets through the Loop FCM display. Continuous loops
perform indication, and calculation functions. Control loops provide output control
and PID loops provide output control with a setpoint. Device loops control discrete
devices such as fans and motors. The templets for these loops are described in the
Configurable Control Functions (CCF) User’s Guide.
3BUR002418-600 A
31
Loop Detail Displays
Section 3 CCF Displays
Loop Detail Displays
The Loop Detail Display provides the means to manipulate tunable parameters. The
information available on this display varies according to the loop type: Control,
Continuous, PID, and Device.
Generally, users with Operator authority have read-only access to the Loop Detail
Display. Control/tuning functions are restricted to System Engineers. The
authority assignment for functions associated with this display can be changed as
described in the Objects and Access Rights section of System 800xA
Configuration (3BDS011222*).
Control and PID Loops
The Loop Detail Display for a PID loop, Figure 2, shows the measured value,
setpoint value, and output value trends for a loop. A reduced or standard size
faceplate is used to modify the setpoint and output values. The trend graph shows up
to 600 points (traces start when the window is displayed). The data is based on CCF
trend data.
The trend Refresh rate on the Loop Detail page, allows you to change the rate at
which a trend graph is updated. Select Refresh to get the Change Refresh Rate
dialog where you can change this rate to any integer number from 1 to 120 seconds,
the default value is 1. After changing the Refresh value, the plot restarts and the
trend is refreshed at the new rate.
The Loop Detail Display also provides the means to set the following loop
parameters:
32
•
Loop setup values, including Phase, Scan Rate, Loop Mode, and Trend Rate.
•
Tuning parameters, including Gain, Reset, and Preact.
•
Alarm configuration conditions:
–
Alarm Post.
–
Alarm Check.
–
Engineering Deadband.
–
Output Deadband.
–
Deviation Deadband.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
–
Control and PID Loops
Enabled/disabled condition, limit value where applicable, and priority for
each alarm parameter (input, setpoint, deviation and output).
Figure 2. Loop Detail Display for a PID Loop
If you click on any field in the process values box, a Faceplate, Figure 3, is
displayed. This faceplate enables you to change the setpoint and output values
displayed for the loop in the Loop Detail Display as well as other values and modes.
Reduced size faceplates, Figure 3, provide the basic operator control actions without
the process bar graphs of the standard size faceplate, Figure 4. The reduced size
faceplates for PID loops show measure, setpoint, output and other parameters as
determined by configuration such as bias, ratio, computer mode, feedforward and
feedback. Similarly, the Auto/Manual Ration/Bias (AMRB) loop does not show the
setpoint, Figure 5.
3BUR002418-600 A
33
Control and PID Loops
Section 3 CCF Displays
Figure 3. MOD CCF PID Loop Reduced Faceplate
Figure 4. MOD CCF PID Loop Standard Faceplate
34
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Control and PID Loops
Fields that do not apply to the type of loop being displayed are left blank and the
labels for these fields are dimmed. For Auto/Manual Controller loops, Figure 5, the
following fields are blank: setpoint; setpoint and deviation alarms; deviation
deadband; and tuning values. See Section 8, Operation Examples, for explanations
on the use of the various loop faceplate types.
Figure 5. A/M Ratio/Bias Controller Faceplates
3BUR002418-600 A
35
Device Loops
Section 3 CCF Displays
Device Loops
Figure 6 is an example of the information that is included on a Loop Detail Display
for device loops. Device loops detect the device state. There is no trend or alarm
limit/priority information on Loop Detail Displays for device loops. Select the
command, mode, and state process values box to access the device loop faceplate.
This display also provides the means to set the following device loop parameters.
•
Loop setup values, including: Phase, Scan Rate, Loop Mode, Simulation Mode,
Override Mode, and Lock State. Field State is a read only field and cannot be
changed.
•
Alarm configuration conditions, including Alarm Post, and Alarm Check.
Figure 6. Loop Detail Extended Faceplate for a Device Loop
36
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Device Loops
The device loop standard faceplate, Figure 7, is used to modify command, mode,
and state. Only device descriptor state values of 0 to 15 are allowed.
If the Enable Access Restriction configuration is set to Yes, then device commands
are not allowed while in auto (shaded buttons). If the Manual Enable configuration
is set to Disallowed, then the Manual button is shaded to prevent changes back to
manual (may already be in manual before the configuration change). Allow the
Manual Enable configuration change to process before making mode changes.
Figure 7. MOD CCF Device Loop Standard Faceplate
3BUR002418-600 A
37
Continuous Loops
Section 3 CCF Displays
The device loop reduced faceplate, Figure 8, is also used to modify command,
mode, and state.
Figure 8. MOD CCF Device Loop Reduced Faceplate
Device loops that are Special Device types do not show all possible commands.
The faceplate for a Special Device type only shows four of 16 possible outputs. A
possible CCF workaround is to not connect the device loop to the I/O and outputs
numeric 0 through 16. Instead, the value is decoded in a loop with a GET, some
logic, and DOT fcms to generate the actual output.
Continuous Loops
Indicator loops measure the values of process variables. The types of information
that are included on a Loop Detail Display or a faceplate for indicator loops are: tag,
descriptor, measured variable, engineering units, and alarm indications.
Figure 9 is an example of the types of information that are included on a faceplate
for a calculator type continuous loop. Calculator loops perform calculations on their
inputs. You can use the results of the calculations in other loops.
38
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Loop Faceplates
Figure 9. MOD CCF Reduced Faceplate for Continuous Loop
Loop Faceplates
There are three different faceplate types that support different levels of information,
Figure 5. The reduced size offers basic operator control, the standard size includes
process bar graphs and additional operator controls, and the extended size offers
tuning parameters in the form of the loop detail display. These reduced size and
standard size faceplates are described below. The extended size is discussed in Loop
Detail Displays on page 32.
Tag Identification and Indicators
Contains the tag name, tag descriptor and abnormal state indication, Figure 10. A
tag name can be up to 12 characters and is defined during tag configuration. This
identifies the tag for monitoring and control of the process point. A tag descriptor
can be up to 24 characters and normally explains the purpose of the tag. The
descriptor defined during configuration and then imported into the 800xA system,
after it is imported it is no longer updated.
An abnormal condition for a continuous loop is checked when the ABNORMAL
STATE Field on page 219 is set to yes.
3BUR002418-600 A
39
Process Bar Graphs and Values
Section 3 CCF Displays
Tag
Alarm Acknowledge
Status Area
Auto/ Computer Loc/Rem Loc/Rem Loc/Rem Abnormal
State
Manual / Local
Track
Bias
Ratio
or
Mode or Ramp
Output Track
Setpoint
Figure 10. Faceplate Name Area Features
Process Bar Graphs and Values
The area shown in Figure 11 contains graphical and numerical representations of the
tag being monitored. The bar graph area includes scaled indication bars for
measured value (Pv), setpoint (Sp) and output (Out); slider controls to change
setpoint and output; and alarm markers. The number area includes measured value
(Pv), setpoint (Sp), control output (Out), setpoint high and low limits and ratio (Ra)
and bias (Bi) values. You can use the number area to enter a value for operator
controllable values (configured limits are enforced). Alarms are indicated using
colored backgrounds for priority, flashing for unacknowledged, and the characters H
(high), L (low), D (Deviation), R (Rate) and ? (Bad Data Quality) in front of the
display value. Infinite values will show ?Inf (variations shown on other displays
such as ?1.#IO for status blocks or 1.$e+000 for Loop FCM). The background color
corresponds to the priority color of the highest priority alarm currently active.
40
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Process Bar Graphs and Values
Figure 11. Faceplate Process Bar Graph and Values Features (CCF)
3BUR002418-600 A
41
Operator Controls
Section 3 CCF Displays
Operator Controls
The Operator area, Figure 12, provides controls that manipulate the tag being
displayed. Some of the actions available in the operator area include: change auto or
manual mode, change computer mode, and change set point mode (a shaded button
does not allow change).
If the Confirm button is enabled, all commands in the operator area must be
confirmed by clicking the confirm button when it is active. If Confirm is not clicked
in a configured amount of time, the value will not change and the button will return
to its normal color.
If the hide Confirm button option is enabled, the behavior of the faceplates change
allowing a value to be entered immediately.
The signal indicators and set of state buttons and their definitions are given in
Table 3.
If an operator control is shaded, switching to Auto/Manual or Local/Remote is
not allowed.
Auto/Manual
Computer/Local Remote/Local
Mode
Setpoint
Confirm Button
Ratio Bias Controls
Figure 12. Faceplate Operator Control Features
42
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Operator Controls
Table 3. Buttons and Indicators
Icon
Name
Description
Auto
Switch to Auto from Manual. In auto, the
setpoint and ratio can be adjusted. If shaded,
switching to Auto is not allowed.
Manual
Switch to Manual from Auto. In manual, the
output can be adjusted. If shaded, switching
to Manual is not allowed.
Computer Mode
Request a switch to Computer mode.
Restricted parameters for PID loops are
SETPOINT, SPT_MODE, RESULT and
OUT_MODE. Restricted parameters for
Controller loops are RESULT and
OUT_MODE.
In Computer Mode, you have two options;
LOCAL, where the operator is able to access
the restricted parameters but the computer
cannot, and COMPUTER, where the
computer program is allowed access to the
restricted parameters but the operator is not.
When the COMPUTER option is selected, the
operator can still change control to LOCAL.
3BUR002418-600 A
Local Mode
In Local Mode, the operator is able to access
the restricted parameters but the computer
cannot (see Computer Mode).
Remote
Switch to remote setpoint. Remote setpoint
value is the result of another FCM. If shaded,
switching to Remote is not allowed.
Local
Switch to local setpoint. Local setpoint value
comes from within the PID FCM. The operator
can change this value. If shaded, switching to
Local is not allowed.
43
Operator Controls
Section 3 CCF Displays
Table 3. Buttons and Indicators (Continued)
Icon
Name
Description
Local Bias
Switch to Local Bias operation. Bias value can
be changed locally while in this mode.
Remote Bias
Switch to Remote Bias operation.
Local Ratio
Switch to Local Ratio operation. Ratio value
can be changed locally while in this mode.
Remote Ratio
Switch to Remote Ratio operation.
FeedBack
Feedback is used with the standard integral in
the PID algorithm to provide an anti reset
windup capability. If the feedback input is not
used, the limited output value is used.
FeedForward
This control loop has a feed forward input that
is added or multiplied to the denormalized
AUTO output of the PID algorithm.
FeedForwardFeedBack
Both FeedForward and FeedBack are used.
Control Output
Tracking
Tag is in control output tracking mode. If the
station goes into output tracking mode, the
output percentage adjusts to changes in its
reference signal. Control output changes
cannot be initiated from the workstation when
the tag is in this mode.
Setpoint Tracking Tag is in setpoint tracking mode (LOC and
REM will be shaded). The set point tracks
either the process variable or a selected
variable. The set point cannot be adjusted
from the console in this mode.
44
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Tool Tips
Table 3. Buttons and Indicators (Continued)
Icon
Name
Description
Ramp
Setpoint is being ramped by a TCL source.
Abnormal State
An abnormal condition for a CCF loop is
checked when the ABNORMAL STATE Field
on page 219 is set to yes.
Alarm Active
Alarm active and unacknowledged. Select
Unacknowledged button to acknowledge alarm on CCF or
Device faceplates.
Alarm Active
Acknowledged
Alarm is acknowledged and is still active.
Button will disappear when alarm returns to
normal.
Alarm Returned
Alarm is unacknowledged and has returned to
to Normal
normal. Select button to acknowledge alarm.
Unacknowledged
Tool Tips
Tool tips are activated when the cursor is over a tag, description, buttons or an
editable field. The tool tip appears as descriptive text on the display.
Loop FCM Display
The Loop FCM Display, Figure 13, shows the relationships between the functional
class modules (FCMs) that make up the loop. Each FCM in the loop is represented
by a block on the display.
Both the block type and the name given to the FCM at configuration time appear in
the block. Each block contains status information for the FCM.
When a FCM block is selected, the basic control fields become available on the
lower part of the display. Use these fields to make mode changes and tune setpoint
and output. Runtime versions of the Loop Definition and FCM templets are
3BUR002418-600 A
45
Operating Procedures for CCF Displays
Section 3 CCF Displays
accessible using the LOOP TMPL and FCM TMPL buttons or by double clicking
on the FCM.
Figure 13. Loop FCM Display
Operating Procedures for CCF Displays
This section provides information on the following topics:
46
•
Viewing Trend Data.
•
Taking Control of a Loop.
•
Changing Control Parameters.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Viewing Trend Data
Viewing Trend Data
The source of the values that appear on Loop Detail Display trends are gathered
from real-time CCF trend data. Other trend view objects, as described in System
800xA Operations (3BSE036904*), can show real-time and historical trend data for
several tags at once.
The CCF trend data is scaled, based on the engineering unit range of the tag. When
the CCF trend data is available, and the visibility is enabled, CCF trend data is
displayed. Real-time trend values are not stored and only exist when the trend is
displayed.
Working with Loop Detail Display Trend Data
You can change the visibility of trend traces, adjust the refresh rate of the X-axis, the
range on the Y-axis and use a ruler to see the numerical values of points on the trend
graph.
Changing the Trend Refresh Rate
To change trend refresh rate, select the Refresh button and enter a value in seconds
(1 to 120). A total of 600 samples is shown on a full trend.
Changing the Trend Visibility
To change trace visibility, select the box next to a trace (see figure above). A
checked box becomes a visible trace. Unchecked, a trace is not displayed (data
continues to collect).
Changing the Y-Axis
To modify the Y-Axis, select either side of the trend area on the Y-axis markers.
This displays the Modify Y-Axis dialog. To change the top number on the Y-axis,
3BUR002418-600 A
47
Viewing Trend Data
Section 3 CCF Displays
select the Top of Range field and enter a new number. To change the bottom number
on the Y-axis, select the Bottom of Range field and enter a new number. Click on the
Auto Expand field to dynamically change the range limits to a new limit value as
new values cross the limits. You may also select Use Output Limits to dynamically
change the range limits to a new limit value as the Output Limits are changed. This
only applies to the local machine.
Showing the X-Axis Ruler
To display the ruler dialog, select a point on the trend graph. A ruler is displayed on
the trend graph and moves as the trend is refreshed. This ruler displays the value of
points on the trend graph numerically. The Trend dialog displays the numerical Yaxis values where the ruler intersects each trace on the trend graph. You can move
the ruler to display the numerical values of other points on the graph by clicking on
any other area on the graph. Setpoint applies to PID loop and is zero otherwise.
Output applies to control and PID loop and is zero in continuous loops. Select OK to
close the Ruler Dialog.
48
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Taking Control of a Loop
Taking Control of a Loop
You can take control of a loop from the loop’s faceplate or from the Loop FCM
display by changing a control parameter. Control parameter changes for a loop tag
that are made from these displays allow you to monitor the results of both manual
and auto control operations.
The ability of a user to control a tag is determined by the security access rights
assigned to the control action for the object. If control access is granted for a tag,
you can perform the activities described in the following paragraphs.
Changing Control Parameters
The method of changing a control parameter for a PID, Control or Device loop is
similar in all cases. They may be changed from any operational display where the
loop tag target is displayed.
Using the Faceplate
A general procedure for changing control parameters from a faceplate is provided
below.
1.
Select the tag target on a graphic or the process values box on a Loop Detail
display. This displays the applicable faceplate (based on the kind of tag).
Figure 14 is an example of a faceplate for a PID loop in auto. Faceplates for
other types of loops contain information appropriate to the loop type. Measured
Value (Pv) is an indicate-only field and cannot be changed.
You may have to adjust some preliminary parameters as a prerequisite for
changing the parameter that you actually want to change. For instance, to
change the output, the computer mode must be set to local, and the output
mode must be set to manual.
3BUR002418-600 A
49
Changing Control Parameters
Section 3 CCF Displays
Figure 14. Changing Setpoint on MOD CCF PID Loop Faceplate
2.
Select the entry field, and then enter the new value via the keyboard.
3.
As an alternative, you can use the control slider to change the setpoint or output
value up or down.
4.
Select the Confirm button (or press Enter), if enabled, while it is active to
accept the new slider value.
5.
Repeat the steps above to make changes to the values in any other fields.
6.
Click on the X button to close the window.
Using the Loop FCM Display
A general procedure for changing control parameters from the Loop FCM display is
provided below.
50
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
1.
Tuning/Engineering Procedures for CCF Displays
Select the FCM on a Loop FCM display.
Again, you may have to adjust some preliminary parameters as a prerequisite
for changing the parameter that you actually want to change.
2.
Select the entry field, and then enter the new value via the keyboard.
3.
Press Enter to accept the new value.
Tuning/Engineering Procedures for CCF Displays
This section provides instructions for tuning/engineering functions for CCF
displays. These functions are generally restricted to users with greater authority.
Two levels of tuning are supported by the system. The first level is provided by the
Loop Detail Display. This display provides the means for basic loop tuning such as
gain or limit adjustments. The second level is provided by the Loop FCM Display
and runtime versions of the Loop Definition and FCM templets. These displays
provide the means for more comprehensive tuning, and for changing loop
configurations during runtime (while the system is online). Refer to Engineer
Tuning Displays for a Continuous Loop on page 53 for details.
Tuning Via the Loop Detail Display
You can change tuning, alarm, limits, and loop parameters via the Loop Detail
Display. More advanced tuning functions, not supported by the Loop Detail Display,
are provided via the Loop FCM Display where you can access the Loop Definition
Templet and the Loop FCM Templets for each FCM in the loop.
Changing a Tuning Parameter
Tuning parameters include: gain, reset, preact, and adaptive mode. Adaptive mode is
a read only field and cannot be changed.
To change a tuning parameter (value entry):
1.
Select the Gain value field in the Tuning area of the display. This displays a text
entry field within the current Gain field.
2.
To change the gain value, enter the new value via the keyboard, and press Enter.
The Gain field is updated with the new value.
3BUR002418-600 A
51
Tuning Via the Loop Detail Display
Section 3 CCF Displays
Changes made to any of the parameters on the
Loop Detail Display are not made to the database
until you press Enter. Value is reset if focus is lost.
Entered value goes red after it is written to the controller. Once the new value
come back from the controller it changes back to black.
Changing Limit Parameters
Alarm limit parameters include: InputHiHi, InputHi, InputLoLo, and InputLo
Measured Variable; Input Rate of Change; and Output Rate of Change. Control limit
parameters include: high and low limits for setpoint (SetpointHi, SetpointLo),
deviation, and output. Each of these parameters requires a value entry in the Limit
column. All conditions in this area can be switched between Enabled (checked) and
disabled, and priorities can be set to Standard, High, or Medium.
Quality parameters include: InputBad, SetpointBad, DeviationBad, and OutputBad.
Changing a Loop Parameter
Loop parameters include: phase, scan rate, loop mode, trend rate, alarm posting, and
alarm checking. Phase, scan rate, and trend rate parameters require value entries, the
loop mode can be switched between scan ON and scan OFF, and alarm posting and
alarm checking can be switched between Enable and Disable.
When changing the trend rate, select one of the following valid choices: 0, 6, 12, 60,
120, 360, 720, 1440, and 2880.
Scan Rate equals the Processing Rate divided by the Base Rate. If the Base Rate is
0.5 and the Processing Rate is 1.0, then the Scan Rate is 2.0. Changing the Scan
Rate here actually changes the Processing Rate using the same calculation.
To change a loop mode parameter (list selection):
52
1.
Select the Loop Mode value field in the Tuning area of the display. This
displays a pull down list to the right of the current field.
2.
To change Loop Mode, select the setting you wish to change.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Engineer Tuning Displays for a Continuous Loop
Changing a Device Parameter
Device parameters include: Simulation Mode, Override Mode, Lock State, and
Field State. Field State is a read only field and cannot be changed. The other device
parameters can be switched between ON and OFF in the Device Values area.
Changing Deadband Parameters
Deadband parameters include: Eng Deadband, Output Deadband, and Deviation
Deadband. Each of these parameters requires a value entry.
Engineer Tuning Displays for a Continuous Loop
For tuning and online engineering functions that are beyond the scope of the Loop
Detail Display, the following set of engineering displays are provided on an
individual basis for each loop:
•
The Loop FCM Display shows the sources of inputs, the destination of the
results, and the status of the FCMs. This display is dynamically updated with
runtime data. The display also provides access to the runtime version of the
Loop Definition and FCM templets where actual tuning/engineering changes
are entered.
•
A runtime version of the Loop Definition Templet provides the means to
modify some fields that were originally configured via the Loop Definition
Templet during control database configuration.
•
Runtime versions of the FCM Templets for the loop provide the means to
modify some fields that were originally configured via the FCM Templets
during control database configuration.
Engineer tuning of continuous loops is initiated by using the Loop FCM Display.
Loop FCM Display
The Loop FCM Display, Figure 13, shows the relationships between the functional
class modules (FCMs) that make up the loop.
Each FCM in the loop is represented by a block on the display. Both the block type
and the name given to the FCM at configuration time appear in the block. Each
block contains status information for the FCM which can be a combination of the
information in Table 4.
3BUR002418-600 A
53
Engineer Tuning Displays for a Continuous Loop
Section 3 CCF Displays
The value of the output is displayed on the line that extends from the right side of
the FCM block. You can change the values of the status parameters by selecting the
block and entering a new value in the fields provided along the bottom of the Loop
FCM Display. Continuous values are entered via the regular keyboard keys. For
fields that have a predefined list of discrete choices, you can use the pull down list of
valid choices. The new value is sent to the database after the selection is made or
when you press Enter. The change is only made to the runtime database in the
subsystem containing the loop. It is not made to the installed database in the node
where the configuration software is resident.
Table 4. FCM Status Information
Label
MODE
Description
FCM Mode
Possible States
ON
OFF
OPMD
Output Mode
AUTO
MANUAL
TRACK (PID and Auto/Manual FCMs only)
SPMD
Setpoint Mode
LOCAL (PID FCMs only)
REMOTE (PID FCMs only)
TRACK (PID FCMs only)
STPT
Setpoint Value
(PID FCMs only)
The following read-only information for the current loop is provided in the lower
right corner of the display:
54
•
Tag Name.
•
Loop State as specified on the Loop Definition Templet.
•
Hex address of device/subdevice where the loop resides.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Engineer Tuning Displays for a Continuous Loop
To support Loop FCM Display functions, the following buttons are provided:
LOOP TMPL
This button accesses the runtime version of the Loop Definition
Templet. Figure 15 shows a typical MOD Loop Definition
Templet. See Appendix A, Runtime Templates for a description
of the active runtime fields.
FCM TMPL
This button accesses the runtime versions of the FCM templets
for the loop. A FCM must be selected to see this button (See
LINEAR TBL if a TABL FCM is selected). Double click on the
FCM block also accesses the FCM Templet. See the
Configurable Control Functions (CCF) User’s Guide for a
DETAILED description of the fields on the Loop FCM Templets.
See Appendix A, Runtime Templates for a description of the
active runtime fields.
LINEAR TBL
This button accesses the runtime version of a Breakpoint Sets
Templet (Linearization Update Display) for a selected TABL
FCM. The NAME OF SET is displayed but can not be changed.
Up to 11 X, Y Value pairs can be configured into the breakpoint
table from this display. Valid entry is a floating point number.
See Runtime Version of Breakpoint Sets Templet on page 57.
3BUR002418-600 A
55
Engineer Tuning Displays for a Continuous Loop
Section 3 CCF Displays
Figure 15. Loop Templet Display
Runtime Versions of Loop Definition and FCM Templets
The runtime versions of the templets are used to make the actual tuning changes.
The templets are accessed via the Loop FCM Display as described above. Their
format is similar to the configurator templets in AdvaBuild with the following
exceptions:
56
•
The information is current since it comes directly from the active database.
•
Black values are tunable while the grayed values are not.
•
The AdvaBuild versions of the templets have different buttons.
•
No FCM list is on the runtime version of the Loop Definition Templet.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Engineer Tuning Displays for a Device Loop
Tuning changes are made to database attributes by first changing the information on
the templet and then saving the templet information to the database by selecting the
SAVE button. If the save process is not successful, a message describing the
problem is displayed. After corrective action is taken, you can re-attempt the save
process. Use the X button to exit the templet.
Tuning changes affect both the active database in the subsystem containing the
loop and the installed database on the disk in the node where the AdvaBuild
configuration software resides. Matching the installed database with the
operational database allows tuning changes to remain in effect when a subsystem
or control module is rebooted.
Templets originally used to configure the database retain the old value until the
database is decompiled. Instructions for decompiling a database are provided in
AdvaBuild Basic Functions User’s Guide for the Advant Station-based
AdvaBuild software.
Runtime Version of Breakpoint Sets Templet
The runtime version of the Breakpoint Sets Templet (Linearization Update Display)
is used to change the values of a specific breakpoint set without having to recompile
and install the entire CCF configuration of the node. The templet is accessed via the
Loop FCM Display LINEAR TBL button when a TABLE FCM is selected.
Set the X VALUE, Y VALUE pairs in the edit window using floating point numbers.
Enter from 2 up to 11 x,y pairs. When all required changes to the values are made,
send the new values to the database by selecting the SAVE button. If the save
process is not successful, a message describing the problem is displayed.
SAVE changes both the active database in the subsystem containing the loop and
the installed database on the disk in the node where the configuration software
resides. However, the Breakpoint Sets Templets originally used to configure the
database is not immediately modified. It retains the old values until the database is
decompiled. Instructions for decompiling a database are provided in AdvaBuild
Basic Functions User’s Guide for the Advant Station-based AdvaBuild software.
There is no log of the changes made to the breakpoint sets.
Engineer Tuning Displays for a Device Loop
Access the runtime version of the Device Loop Templet by:
3BUR002418-600 A
57
Alarms
Section 3 CCF Displays
1.
Select the Loop FCM Display.
2.
Select the device block.
3.
Select LOOP TMPL.
There is no FCM Templet for device loops. Use the fields at the bottom of the Loop
FCM Display to make State, Mode and Command changes.
Alarms
Alarms based on the process measurement are defined as part of the loop. Alarms
on Setpoint, Output, Deviation, or other control parameters are defined as part of the
FCM. Each alarm has several parameters that can be set on an alarm type basis.
Each alarm type can be turned on or off. The assigned priority to the alarm type is
set to STANDARD, MED, or HIGH.
When rebooting a Connectivity Server node pair where MOD 300
messages/events are routed, wait until the primary Connectivity Server node is
fully booted and active before rebooting the standby Connectivity Server node to
prevent an alarm mismatch.
Alarm Post and Alarm Check
Alarm suppression is a useful feature during startup or shutdown conditions when
nuisance alarms can be generated by equipment that is not in service. ALARM
CHECK can be turned off (Disabled) during periods when the alarm conditions
should not be tested. ALARM POST provides the capability to prevent (Disabled)
alarms from printing and/or generating audible indication on operator consoles.
With ALARM CHECK Enabled and ALARM POST Disabled, the alarm conditions
will be tested and will be visible on displays; but, they will not generate unwanted
audible indications.
Use pull down selections on the Loop
Detail display to Enable/Disable Alarm
Post and Alarm Check functions.
58
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Alarm Detection
Alarm Detection
PID loops detect alarms on the measured variable, setpoint, deviations, and output.
Control loops (Auto/Manual for example) detect alarms on the measured variable
and output. Continuous loops (indicator and calculator for example) detect alarms
on the measured variable.
Measured variable alarms are trip points. Setpoint and output alarms are limit
alarms on their high or low value. Deviation alarms compare the difference between
the measured variable (going into the PID FCM) and the setpoint. A high deviation
occurs when the measured variable of the PID FCM is above the setpoint by the
limit amount. The deviation value is never limited by the system.
The input and output rate alarms compare the number of engineering units set as the
limit to the actual change in one loop cycle.
Discrete loops detect device related alarms. The device alarms are:
•
ILLEGAL (Illegal State or Command). The system can read the feedback from
the device, but no state is defined for the feedback bit combination or Systems
recognize the command from the operator or the TCL program, but it is an
invalid command as defined by the Device Descriptor Templet.
•
ABNORMAL (Abnormal State Change). The device changed state, but no
command to do so was issued. Abnormal State Change alarms will not occur if
the state changes to match DEV_CMND.
•
TRANSITION (Unknown State or Timeout). The system cannot read the
feedback from the device or the system sent a valid command to the device, but
the device did not respond within the specified time.
•
STATE (State Alarm). The device has entered a state defined by the device
descriptor set as an alarm state for the device.
Alarm Indication and Viewing
Alarm priority is indicated using colored backgrounds and the characters H (high),
L (low), D (Deviation), R (Rate) and ? (Bad data quality) in front of the display
value. The background color of the highest priority alarm currently active is
displayed. An unacknowledged alarm blinks. On faceplates, an Alarm
Acknowledge button appears when an unacknowledged alarm exists. Indications are
also made for Active Alarm Acknowledged and Inactive Alarm Unacknowledged.
3BUR002418-600 A
59
Alarm Priority
Section 3 CCF Displays
Alarm conditions may also be indicated audibly by a .WAV file. Various
combinations of audible and visual alarm indication can be obtained by
configuration. Refer to the System 800xA Operations (3BSE036904*) for a
description of the event bar and event display included with the base product.
Alarm Priority
A priority (High, Medium, Standard) can be assigned to each alarm, Figure 16.
Alarm priorities are used to display a more important alarm before a less important
alarm when viewing the alarm displays.
Figure 16. Alarm Limit and Priority Settings
If you are using both the deviation and setpoint limit alarms, it is possible, when
the alarms are not acknowledged and priorities are the same, to see the deviation
active on the faceplate and the setpoint limit active on the loop detail. Use
different priorities.
Alarm Limits and Limiting
The high and low alarm limit trip-points for each control loop are determined at the
time of configuration and can be modified during operation, Figure 16.
Process and deviation alarms are triggered by the process input. A process alarm
trips (becomes active) when the process reaches a preset high or low trip-point. A
deviation alarm trips when the process value deviates from the control loop setpoint
by a preset amount (deviation high value is when the measured value into the PID
FCM is larger than the setpoint and deviation low value is when it is less than the
setpoint).
An output alarm is activated when the control loop output reaches a preset high or
low limit. Alarms resulting from rising values are defined as high, and those
resulting from falling values are defined as low. The terms high high and low low
60
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Alarm Acknowledgement
mean that two separate alarms are configured on a single variable with either two
high or two low trip points.
The high, low, and rate of change alarms are extensions of output limiting. For
example, the OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT specifies the maximum output value. This
value is used as a limit in modes where limiting is allowed by the LIMITED
OUTPUT MODES field. In a similar manner, the high and low setpoint alarms can
be limited by the LIMITED SETPT MODES field. Ratio and bias are limited by the
LIMITED RATIO MODES and LIMITED BIAS MODES fields.
Alarm Acknowledgement
Alarms provide indication on each unacknowledged and active alarm. You can
acknowledge all alarms for a tag at once using either the Acknowledge Alarm
button or by selecting the context menu for the object and using Acknowledge verb.
Alarm acknowledgement may also be done through Alarm lists and graphics.
Figure 17 illustrates Alarm Acknowledgement from the faceplate.
Figure 17. Alarm Acknowledgement on Faceplate
3BUR002418-600 A
61
MOD Group Displays
Section 3 CCF Displays
MOD Group Displays
A group is a collection of related loops. Generally, a group has up to 12 control
loops or up to 36 indicator loops or a combination of both. Control loops assigned to
indicator targets provide limited information and cannot be used for control.
Monitoring and control functions (control is enabled in the MOD Group Object) are
provided in the Group Status and Group Trend displays. A custom graphic can be
configured for the Group Graphic display. The Group Alarm display is a filtered list
of a selected event group page.
Group Status Display
The Group Status Display, Figure 18, shows the current status of all tags within the
group by organizing the tags into status blocks (one per control loop, and up to three
indicator loops). Trend data is shown for PID and A/M control loops which have
trending configured in the database. Device loop status blocks show tag, descriptor,
command state, mode, and state. Indicator loop status blocks show basic
information for up to three tags.
62
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Group Status Display
Figure 18. Group Status Display
PID and A/M Status Blocks
The PID status block shows tag, descriptor, setpoint (SP) value and mode, measured
variable value, engineering units, output value and mode, computer mode, a current
output value bar graph, a current measured value bar graph with setpoint and limits,
engineering low limit, engineering high limit, FF/FB, and a trend graph. Alarm
indication and viewing is as described in Alarms on page 58. The Auto Manual and
continuous loops are similar to the PID minus the setpoint and FF/FB mode
information.
3BUR002418-600 A
63
Group Status Display
Section 3 CCF Displays
The trend graph represents one division of trended data (60 sampled points) from
the engineering low limit to the engineering high limit. The most current trend
sample is on the right side of the graph. Trend data is only displayed if the trend rate
is enabled (not 0) for the tag. To see the trend data for a specific time, select on the
trend graph. A trend ruler with the measured value, time and data quality for that
data point is then shown. To view fully functional trends for a group, access the
Group Trend Display.
Figure 19. PID and A/M Status Blocks
Control functions within the block depend on how the loop is configured and user
authority. Setpoint mode and value, computer mode, output mode and value, and
FF/FB are all controllable. The block is context sensitive to its own tag. Double
clicking on the tag name displays the loop faceplate.
Continuous Loop Status Blocks
Continuous loop status blocks show tag name, description, measured value and
engineering units. There are no control items.
Device Loop Status Blocks
Device loop status blocks show tag, descriptor, command state, mode, and state. The
command, mode, and state values can be modified if enabled for control in the
64
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Group Status Display
MOD Group Object. Only device descriptor command and state values of 0 to 15
are shown. Use the loop fcm if your configuration uses greater values.
Indicator Status Blocks
Indicator loop status blocks show tag and descriptor as well as measured variable,
engineering units and alarm indications for PID, continuous or A/M loops or
command state for device loops. There are no control elements for tags using the
indicator loop status block.
Alarm Indication and Viewing
Alarm indication and viewing is as described in Alarms on page 58.
Figure 20. Device Loop and Indicator Status Blocks
3BUR002418-600 A
65
Group Trend Display
Section 3 CCF Displays
Group Trend Display
The Group Trend Display, Figure 21, provides trend records for up to 12 loops.
Group trends are displayed on three full-width graphs. Each graph shows trends for
up to four loops, and is accompanied by the corresponding status blocks. The most
current trend sample is on the right side of the grid. MOD 300 trend buffers are
supported and the most recent 300 points are read if a Log Configuration aspect is
configured for the tag.
Figure 21. Group Trend Display
Group Trend Graph
Each of the four tags on a graph can have its own vertical scale (if limits are
different) with the upper and lower ranges displayed next to the trend graph. A
maximum of 300 data points can be trended for each tag. To display the value of a
point on a trend graph numerically, click on a trend trace.
Each trend line in a graph is color coded to match its tag and range color. The
context menu for the trend is the same as for the standard trend.
66
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Group Trend Display
Group Trend Status Blocks
To make changes to a loop on the Group Trend Display, select the desired field in
the loop’s status block, Figure 22. Control functions within the block depend on
how the loop is configured and user authority. Setpoint mode and value, computer
mode, FF/FB, output mode and value are all controllable. The block is context
sensitive to its own tag. Double clicking on the tag name displays the loop faceplate.
Changing
Output
Changing
Setpoint
Mode
FF, FB, FFFB
Output Mode
Figure 22. Changing Values in Status Blocks for Group Trends
Indicator
Device
Continuous
Auto/
Manual
Figure 23. Sample Group Trend Status Blocks
Alarm Indication and Viewing
Alarm indication and viewing is as described in Alarms on page 58.
3BUR002418-600 A
67
Group Graphic Display
Section 3 CCF Displays
Group Graphic Display
The Group Graphic Display, Figure 24, presents a custom graphic for a group and
status blocks for each tag in the group. The status blocks occupy the right one-third
of the screen, and the graphic occupies the left two-thirds of the screen. Status
blocks operate as described in Group Trend Status Blocks on page 67.
Figure 24. Group Graphic Display
Typically, tags in the group are represented by one or more graphic symbols on the
graphic display. The symbols may be static or dynamic (changing to show dynamic
changes in the process).
There is a Group Graphic aspect for each group. The graphic configured for that
aspect gets displayed in the Group Graphic display.
68
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Group Alarm Display
Group Alarm Display
The Group Alarm Display is a selected event group page with an additional filter
applied based upon the tags assigned to the MOD environment group. The primary
event group page is a filtered set of event attributes such as state (acknowledged and
active) and type (operator action and process related). All events matching the event
filter are considered to be part of the event group.
The filters defined in the event group narrow the scope of events seen by the event
page. The event page can provide further filtering of the events but cannot expand
beyond the filter of the event group.
When the Group Alarm display is first called up, the primary filter is applied and
then the filtered list of tags assigned to the group is applied.
MOD Area Displays
An area is a collection of up to three groups. As such, each area is composed of up
to 108 loops (control loops, indicator loops, or a combination of both). This
provides a broader view of the process from a single display. Each area supports
monitoring and control functions using Area Alarm and Area Status displays. A
custom graphic display can be configured for the Area Graphic display.
Area Status Display
The Area Status Display, Figure 25, shows the current status of all tags in the area
(up to three groups).
The display is divided by rows into three groups with Group 1 in the top third,
Group 2 in the middle third, and Group 3 in the bottom third. As many as 12 status
lines make up a group.
3BUR002418-600 A
69
Area Status Display
Section 3 CCF Displays
Figure 25. Area Status Display
One to three indicators are displayed on one status line, Figure 26, depending on the
configuration. Each indicator line segment is context sensitive to its own tag.
Tag
Measured
Variable Eng
Value
Units
Tag
AC1-PID1
50.5000
SC5_1_ALG1 L5.0000
GPM
Measured
Variable
Value
Tag
Device
State
B1_1-DEV1 ST_0
Figure 26. Indicate Status Line (PID, Continuous, Device)
70
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Area Alarm Display
For a PID control loop, information is displayed on one status line, Figure 27. The
measured value bar graph also indicates the setpoint value with an orange triangle
on the bottom of the graph, and it indicates the input high and low limits with red
triangles on the top of the graph.
Tag
Descriptor
Measured
Variable Eng Cmp Bar Graph
Setpoint
FF/FB Output
Mode Value Value
Units Mode EngLo - EngHi Mode ModeValue
AC1-PID1
Unit 1 Controller
REM
50.0000 50.5000
GPM
FF
L
AUT
25.0000
Figure 27. PID Status Line
The target areas within the status line depend on how the loop is configured and user
authority. Controllable items are setpoint mode and value, computer mode, FF/FB
mode, output mode and value. The line is context sensitive to its own tag. Double
clicking on the tag displays the loop faceplate. Auto manual loops are similar to the
PID status line without the PID specific information.
The Device Loop status line includes one device loop tag, Figure 28. The line is
context sensitive to its own tag. Mode and Command are controllable depending
upon authority.
Tag
Descriptor
Mode
Command
State
B1_1-DEV8
3 IN 0 OUT
AUTO
TRANSITION
STATE 3
Figure 28. Device Status Line
Area Alarm Display
The Area Alarm Display is a selected event group page with an additional filter
applied based upon the tags assigned to the MOD environment area. The primary
event group page is a filtered set of event attributes such as state (acknowledged and
active) and type (operator action and process related). All events matching the event
filter are considered to be part of the event group.
3BUR002418-600 A
71
Area Graphic Display
Section 3 CCF Displays
The filters defined in the event group narrow the scope of events seen by the page.
The page can provide further filtering of the events but cannot expand beyond the
filter of the event group.
When the Area Alarm display is first called up, the primary filter is applied and then
the filtered list of tags assigned to the area is applied.
Area Graphic Display
The Area Graphic Display, Figure 29, provides a custom graphical depiction of a
given area. Any tag in the area may be represented by one or more graphic symbols
on the graphic display. The symbols may be static or dynamic (changing to show
dynamic changes in the process). The graphic symbols and their dynamics are
defined during display building. The Area Graphic Display does not have a standard
format. These displays are custom designed to meet the process monitoring and
control requirements of a specific application.
Figure 29. Area Graphic Display
72
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 3 CCF Displays
Area Graphic Display
There is an Area Graphic aspect for each area. The graphic configured for that
aspect gets displayed in the Area Graphic display.
3BUR002418-600 A
73
Area Graphic Display
74
Section 3 CCF Displays
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Operational Displays for TCL
This section describes the standard operational displays for sequential control using
the Taylor Control Language (TCL). Sequential control operational displays support
monitoring and control functions for TCL. Functions you can perform using the
sequential operational displays include:
•
Monitoring units and sequences.
•
Activating and deactivating programs.
•
Controlling program state, status, and mode.
•
Manipulating steps.
•
Changing recipe values.
•
Changing tag parameters.
•
Recovery from TCL Abnormal conditions for invalid S88 state changes, see
Batch Connectivity to M0D 300 on page 101.
Users with the proper access authority can also troubleshoot and debug programs
under runtime conditions from a Sequence Debug Display as well as receive and
respond to unit messages. Users who are not assigned to a particular unit can
monitor programs on the unit; however, they cannot perform control functions or
receive messages.
The Acknowledge selection on the TCL context menu acknowledges all the
messages from any of the TCL displays.
3BUR002418-600 A
75
Displays for Sequence and Recipe Development
Section 4 TCL Displays
Displays for Sequence and Recipe Development
TCL sequences and recipes are developed using the TCL Editor and TCL Recipe
Editor respectively. These editors are available with AdvaBuild.
TCL Version Mismatch Warning
If the source code of a TCL sequence is re-compiled or modified after that sequence
has been loaded, a warning message, Figure 30, is displayed on the Unit Detail,
SFC, Sequence Detail, or Sequence Debug display as follows:
WARNING: SEQUENCE SOURCE MISMATCH
On the Unit Detail page, the affected sequences are also indicated by the Sequence
ID having yellow text.
Figure 30. TCL Version Mismatch Warning
76
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
TCL / Unit Message Display
TCL / Unit Message Display
The TCL / Unit Message Display, Figure 31, lists certain need-to-know process
condition messages sent from executing TCL programs. Messages which require a
response cause the originating sequence to pause until an appropriate response is
entered.
The TCL Message Display includes all TCL messages while the Unit Message
Display includes only those TCL messages associated with the selected unit. These
message displays are similar to the standard alarm/message displays as described in
the base product instructions.
While configuring the TCL Message aspect, user needs to create a TCL Unit
Overview aspect in order to have access to the TCL Messages.
TCL Message Display Format
The data displayed for each message includes the acknowledgement status, colored
priority/alarm indication (High, Medium, Standard), event type, arrival date and
time, the unit from which the message was sent and the message itself.
Acknowledge and Respond to a Message
Acknowledge individual events by selecting the Ack box or a group of events by
selecting a group of boxes. Acknowledge a page of messages by using
Acknowledge on the menu line.
To respond to a TCL message, select the appropriate line (MOD TCL Reply
category) and enter the appropriate answer in the reply field, Figure 31, and OK the
message. Messages requiring a response are removed from the screen after a
response is given.
The acknowledge dialog box will display the name of the TCL program that
generated the message as well as the name of the associated unit in the title bar.
3BUR002418-600 A
77
Unit Overview Display
Section 4 TCL Displays
Figure 31. TCL Message Display
Unit Overview Display
The Unit Overview Display, Figure 32, lists all the units configured for the system,
as well as the batches and recipes associated with each unit when viewed from the
default MOD300 TCL Unit Overview aspect at the database control structure
level. Additional aspects can be added at lower control structure levels to see just
those units in a specific Area for example. Units are sets of devices and their
associated tanks, reactors, and so on which are treated as entities when being
controlled by TCL programs. The Unit Overview Display provides the following
information for each unit:
•
Unit ID (name) and description.
•
Batch ID, if any.
•
Recipe ID currently associated with the unit, if any.
The TCL Unit Overview displays only units associated with a given OPC Service
Group. If the system configuration has multiple connectivity server pairs, user
has to create a TCL Unit Overview aspect for the OPC Service Group on each
connectivity server pair in order to view all units in the system. Placing the TCL
Unit Overview aspect on the MOD_DB level will display all units in system
when there is only one pair of connectivity servers.
78
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Unit Overview Display
Click on the Unit ID field to access the Unit Detail display for the selected unit.
Figure 32. Unit Overview Display
3BUR002418-600 A
79
Unit Detail Display
Section 4 TCL Displays
Unit Detail Display
The Unit Detail Display, Figure 33, lists the sequences that reside on and can be run
on a unit. This display is used to:
•
Load a sequence onto the unit.
•
Load a recipe onto the unit.
•
Make state, mode, and status changes.
•
Remove a sequence from the unit when it is no longer needed.
•
Select a specific Sequence Detail, Debug, Recipe Detail, or SFC display.
Figure 33. Unit Detail Display
Unit Detail Display Format
The top of the display contains the unit ID and description, the ID of the recipe
associated with the unit, and the batch ID. There is a field for entering a sequence
load request, a field for entering a recipe load request, and a Remove Sequence
button.
80
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Loading the Sequence from the Unit Detail Display
The information shown in the main portion of the display for each sequence in the
unit includes:
Sequence ID
Sequence program name.
Sequence Type
Schedule, Procedure, or Operation.
Sequence State
Active, Inactive, Paused, Loading.
Sequence Mode
Auto, Manual, Semi_Auto.
Sequence Status
Normal, Abnormal 1 - 16.
Step Text
Current step in active sequence or if inactive, step executed
when sequence became inactive.
Each column width can be adjusted by clicking on the title border and sliding the
width indicator left or right.
Loading the Sequence from the Unit Detail Display
Note the ID of the sequence you want to download (refer to your AdvaBuild
documentation). Access the Unit Detail Display of the unit where the sequence is to
be downloaded.
To load a sequence onto a unit:
1.
Select the Sequence Load Request field
2.
Enter the ID for the desired sequence (optionally, you may load the sequence to
a slave unit by entering, SLAVE after the Sequence ID)
3.
Press ENTER
Wait while the system downloads the sequence to the unit. The message
Loading Sequence sequence name
is displayed while the system downloads the sequence. When downloading is
complete, the sequence and its related data are shown in the list of sequences. The
initial state of a just-downloaded sequence is inactive.
3BUR002418-600 A
81
Loading a Recipe from the Unit Detail Display
Section 4 TCL Displays
Loading a Recipe from the Unit Detail Display
Note the ID of the recipe you want to download (refer to your Advabuild
documentation). Access the Unit Detail Display of the unit where the recipe is to be
downloaded.
To load a recipe onto a unit,
1.
Select the entry field to the right of the Recipe Load Request in the Unit
Detail Display.
2.
Type the ID for the desired recipe (optionally, you may load the recipe to a
slave unit by entering, SLAVE after the recipe ID)
3.
Press ENTER. The message
Loading Recipe recipe name
is displayed while the system is downloading the recipe.
When downloading is complete, the new Recipe ID is displayed in the Recipe ID
field. You can load one recipe per unit.
Changing Sequence State, Mode, and Status
The sequence state, mode, and status can be changed by selecting one of the
sequences listed on the Unit Detail Display. Use the pull down boxes to make your
selection.
Functions for sequence state are:
ACTIVATE
Starts executing steps.
RESUME
Starts a paused sequence.
PAUSE
Stops a sequence between steps, making it paused.
ABORT
Ends a sequence in the middle of a step, making it inactive.
For example, to activate an inactive sequence, select ACTIVATE. To end an active
sequence, select ABORT. The abort action causes the TCL sequence to end
immediately without further action by that sequence while the current process
conditions remain unchanged.
82
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Changing Sequence State, Mode, and Status
Functions for sequence mode are:
AUTO
Programs execute steps in order without requiring operator
intervention.
SEMI_AUTO
Programs execute steps automatically, but pause at
configured breakpoints. The operator can then resume or
abort.
MANUAL
Programs execute manually.
The semiautomatic mode and manual mode support troubleshooting and debugging
sequences.
Functions for sequence status are:
NORMAL
Indicates that no abnormal conditions exist. Normal is the
default mode after downloading.
ABNORMAL
Indicates that an abnormal condition exists. The number to
the right of ABNORMAL defines the type of condition. See
Taylor Control Language (TCL) for AdvaBuild User's Guide
for information about the abnormal conditions.
Removing one or more Sequences
To remove a sequence from the unit, first select (highlight) the sequence (or list of
sequences) to be removed, then click on the REMOVE SEQUENCE button.
Selecting a Specific Sequence for SFC, Sequence Detail, or Debug
Display
To select a specific sequence for SFC, Sequence Detail,
or Debug display, select the Sequence ID, right click for
the context menu and select the SFC, Sequence Detail
Display or Sequence Debug Display.
3BUR002418-600 A
83
Sequence Detail Display
Section 4 TCL Displays
Sequence Detail Display
The Sequence Detail Display, Figure 34, supports runtime monitoring and
manipulation of an individual sequence. Most of the runtime changes made to a
sequence are done from this display. The changes you can make include:
•
Step manipulation (up to 255 steps supported).
•
Sequence state, mode, or status.
Figure 34. Sequence Detail Page
A limit of 255 steps can be displayed. Additional steps are indicated by the text:
“*TEXT NOT AVAILABLE*”. These steps can be expanded on the SFC display
to get their data.
84
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Sequence Detail Display Format
Sequence Detail Display Format
The unit ID, recipe ID, batch ID, and sequence are shown at the top of the Sequence
Detail Display. Step data fields show the current step, next step, step time (the time
spent executing the current step), and pause step (or the step on which the program
pauses in semiauto mode). There are also fields that show the current state, mode,
priority, and status. The Display Steps field lists the sequence steps in numerical
order, with the currently executing step highlighted.
Choosing a Sequence for Sequence Detail
Direct access of a sequence detail is possible from the MOD_SEQUENCE object
which specifies a valid sequence as defined during configuration. Otherwise, a
listing of TCL sequences is provided when you first enter a MOD Sequence Detail
display from a MOD_UNIT object. Choose the sequence to be loaded from the list
on the Sequence List display, Figure 35.
Figure 35. TCL Sequence List
Changing Sequence State, Mode, and Status
To change state, mode, or status, use the pull-down list and make your selection.
Manipulating Sequence Steps
Sequence steps can be operated manually one at a time or semi-automatically. Steps
can be skipped and they can also be repeated. To make step changes, first select the
step, and then enter the new values in the Next Step and Pause Step boxes. Next Step
3BUR002418-600 A
85
SFC (Sequential Function Chart) Display
Section 4 TCL Displays
causes the step indicated to be executed after the current step. The next step can skip
or repeat other steps as necessary. Pause Step determines at which step the sequence
stops and waits for an operator response.
SFC (Sequential Function Chart) Display
The SFC (Sequential Function Chart) Display, Figure 36, supports runtime
monitoring and manipulation of an individual sequence by presenting information,
similar to that found in the Sequence Detail Display, but with a graphical flow chart
format. This chart presents TCL steps and activities (actions a sequence will
execute), along with the transition conditions which determine the flow of the
sequence execution. Activities and conditions describe the program flow in plain
language rather than the TCL syntax used in the Sequence Debug Display.
Figure 36. SFC Display
86
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
SFC Display Format
When changing a value on the SFC Display, there is an indication of the change
that was made, but then the value turns black with the previous value shown
instead of the newly written value. However, the write does occur and the first
scan shows the old value and then the next scan shows the written value.
SFC Display Format
The Unit ID and Description, Recipe ID, Batch ID, and Sequence are shown at the
top of the SFC Display. Step data fields show the Current step, Next step, Pause step
(the step on which the program pauses), and Step time (the time spent executing the
current step). Refer to Manipulating Sequence Steps on page 85.
State, Mode, and Status are changed using a pull-down list to make your selection.
For information on using this dialog, refer to Changing Sequence State, Mode, and
Status on page 85.
The Follow Current Active Step check box, when selected, automatically follows
the current active step as the sequence progresses. The step that is currently active is
shown expanded in the center of the display. You can also expand or collapse a step
by clicking on it. Only one step can be expanded at a time.
An expanded step, Figure 37, shows its activities, conditions, and transitions. When
a step is expanded, the area to the right of the step displays the activities and
conditions associated with the step in an independent window. Activity statements
appear flat, and condition statements appear raised. Use the scroll bars to see any
activities or conditions that do not fit in the window.
3BUR002418-600 A
87
SFC Display Operation
Section 4 TCL Displays
Figure 37. SFC Display with Expanded Step
Transitions are shown beneath the activities and conditions window for a step. There
are two types of transition windows. If a transition contains a GOTO which
addresses the next step in the TCL sequence, it is displayed with the step number
and step text beneath the tic mark on the main program flow line. Transitions which
refer to other steps or which do not have GOTO actions are displayed in the
expanded step area. If a GOTO is present, the step number is displayed on a button
following the transition tic mark. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see additional
transitions, if necessary.
Activities and conditions can have both load text and runtime text. The load text is
displayed when the sequence is first loaded. It is replaced by runtime text as that
part of the sequence is executed. Load text describes what should happen during
execution of the sequence; runtime text describes what actually happens. Transitions
only have load text. Each transition has two load texts (one for each button).
SFC Display Operation
Activities
Step activities specify the actions that will be performed in each program step.
Activities are highlighted to illustrate the degree of execution of the program (the
88
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
SFC Display Operation
point the program has progressed to). There are three highlight states: Base, LastExecuted, and Executed. Table 5 lists the highlight states and their colors.
Table 5. SFC Highlight States
Presentation
ACTIVITY
CONDITION
TRANSITION
White on gray or blue Base
Base
Base
Green on gray
Executed
Executed-True
Evaluated-True
Goldenrod on gray
<Not Used>
Executed-False
Evaluated-False
Black on green
Last-Executed
<Not Used>
<Not Used>
Conditions
Step conditions contain tag references for operator control. There are three highlight
states for condition statements: Base, Executed-True (the expression in the
statement directly following the condition is true), and Executed-False (the
expression is false). Refer to Table 5 for highlight colors.
Selecting a condition provides direct control access to the database reference
associated with the condition. You can change the value of the referenced database
point in order to satisfy the expression in the statement following the condition.
To gain control access, right click on a transition button, then select either the Loop
FCM Display or the faceplate for the loop associated with the transition. You can
change loop values from either the Loop FCM Display or faceplate.
Operator access to the database reference is only available after the statement has
been executed.
Transitions
Step transitions contain tag references for operator control. There are three highlight
states for transition statements: Base, Evaluated-True (the transition expression is
evaluated as true), and Evaluated-False (the transition expression is evaluated as
false). Refer to Table 5 for highlight colors.
3BUR002418-600 A
89
SFC Display Operation
Section 4 TCL Displays
Selecting a transition provides direct control access to the database reference(s)
associated with the transition. You can change the value of the referenced database
point to satisfy the transition expression.
To gain control access, right click on a transition button, then select either the Loop
FCM Display or the control dialog for the loop associated with the transition. You
can change loop values from either the Loop FCM Display or control dialog.
Operator access to the database reference is only available after the statement has
been executed.
90
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Sequence Debug Display
Sequence Debug Display
The Sequence Debug Display, Figure 38, supports runtime troubleshooting and
debugging of sequences. The troubleshooting and debug functions on this display
are trace and breakpoint. Control functions supported by the sequence debug display
are: sequence state, mode, and status changes.
Figure 38. Sequence Debug Display
Sequence Debug Display Format
The Unit ID, Sequence, Time Stamp, Current Statement number, Follow current
St#, and the sequence State, Mode, Priority level and Status are shown at the top of
3BUR002418-600 A
91
Choosing a Sequence for Debug Display
Section 4 TCL Displays
the display. Below this are toggle buttons that show the status of the Breakpoint and
Trace debug functions. You can move the contents of the display to a requested
point in the program through the Find and Goto buttons. A Font selection allows
you to display large, medium or small fonts and consequently fewer or more lines in
the main portion of the display. The main portion of the display shows a listing of
the sequence source statements as they were written using the TCL Editor, and an
executable line number for each statement. Note that the Sequence Source field will
appear if an alias is used. At the end of the listing, TCL Compiler Summary and
TCL Linker Summary information is included.
Choosing a Sequence for Debug Display
A listing of TCL sequences is provided when you first enter a MOD Sequence
Debug display. Choose the sequence to be loaded from the list on the Sequence List
display, Figure 35 (typical).
Sequence Source
The message “Unable to read sequence source.” is displayed when opening the
Sequence Debug display if the source is down, such as when AdvaBuild is not online, or when batch uses an alias for the sequence. If an alias is being used, type the
sequence name in the Sequence Source box, Figure 38, and press Enter to view the
TCL program. If necessary, bring the sequence source on-line and then enter the
sequence name.
An alias is automatically created when a sequence is used twice on the same unit.
The Sequence Source box allows you to resolve which sequence is to be used. Used
within batch, aliases allow an additional copy of a TCL program to be loaded to a
unit without having to duplicate the program in the catalog.
Changing Sequence State, Mode, and Status
Select state, mode or status conditions from the pull-down lists to make changes.
Sequence Debug Program Functions
Sequence debug program functions include trace and breakpoint definition. In
addition, you can use Find and Goto to move the contents of the display to a requested
92
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Sequence Debug Program Functions
point in the program. The current statement is highlighted while the program is executing.
Select Follow current St# to follow the current statement.
Find
To go to a specific text string in the program,
select the Find button. This displays the Find
window. Select the Find field and enter the case
sensitive text string you wish to find (a pull down
list lets you select previous text strings). Use Up to
search backward through the program, or Down
to search forward through the program. Use Find
Next to continue the search.
Goto
To go to a specific line number, select the Goto button.
This displays the Goto window. Select the Goto
Statement field and enter the line number you wish to
go to. Then click on the Goto button. The line you
requested is displayed in the source statements window.
Trace
The trace function tracks the chronological order of the last 12 executed statements
during MANUAL program execution. It can be enabled or disabled at any time and
may also be applied to up to four variables.
To enable or disable the trace list, select the Trace Enabled check box.
To view the Trace Window, Figure 39, select the Trace Window check box. The
window shows a Trace Steps list of the last 12 executable statements. You can add
up to four trace local or database variables which are of type integer or real in the
Trace Window.
To add a trace variable, enter the variable in the text entry field, then press Enter.
The variable is then displayed in the list of Trace Variables.
3BUR002418-600 A
93
Sequence Debug Program Functions
Section 4 TCL Displays
To modify a variable, select the variable in the Trace Variables list and Enter the new
value in the text entry field. To delete a variable, select the variable in the Trace
Variables list and then click on the Delete button. To delete all variables, click on the
Delete All button.
Click on the Close button to close the Trace Window.
Click on the Cancel button to deselect a chosen variable, and click on the Close
button to close the Trace Variable Window.
Trace variables can be created or modified while a sequence is in AUTO mode. This
creates a trace variable record in the controller; however, the trace variable record is
not applied to the sequence at this time. Trace variable changes are applied to a
sequence only when the sequence is in MANUAL mode and tracing is enabled. Any
latent (not yet applied) trace variable records are applied when a sequence
transitions from AUTO to MANUAL mode (with tracing enabled). Trace variable
records can be displayed from any Trace window. For example, you could go over to
a different Sequence Debug and see the trace variable not yet applied.
94
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Sequence Debug Program Functions
Figure 39. Trace Steps and Variable Window
Breakpoint
Breakpoints support testing of program logic via manual program execution. When
breakpoints are enabled, the sequence is executed until the sequence reaches a line
at which a breakpoint has been set. The sequence then enters the paused state, where
it remains until either resumed or aborted. While the sequence is in the paused state,
tests can be performed and commands can be given to check the sequence logic. The
breakpoint function is enabled and disabled without disturbing breakpoints that
have been set.
Breakpoints are indicated on the Sequence Debug Display by a
symbol) to the left of the step number.
3BUR002418-600 A
(green dot
95
Sequence Debug Program Functions
Section 4 TCL Displays
To enable breakpoints, select the Breakpoint Enabled box. A breakpoint can be set
at five different lines, causing the sequence to execute until it reaches a line at which
a breakpoint has been set.
To set a breakpoint at a certain line, either select the Breakpoint Window box (this
displays the Breakpoint Window, Figure 40) or click in the Brk column (this sets a
breakpoint as indicated by a red then green dot). To set the first breakpoint in the
Breakpoint Window, enter the line number of the line where the first breakpoint is
to occur in the Statement field. There can be up to five breakpoints.
To delete a breakpoint, either select a breakpoint on the Breakpoints list in the
Breakpoint Window and then click on the Delete button, or click on a
(green
dot symbol) on the Sequence Debug Display (the dot will change to red then
disappear when the breakpoint is deleted).
Figure 40. Breakpoint Window
96
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Recipe Detail
Recipe Detail
The Recipe Detail Display, Figure 41, shows the recipe items and accompanying
data values for the recipe residing on the unit. Runtime changes to recipe parameters
are made via this display.
Figure 41. Recipe Detail Display
Recipe Detail Display Format
The unit ID, unit description, recipe ID, and batch ID are shown at the top of the
display. The main portion of the display shows the values for each recipe parameter
(referred to as recipe item). The display provides the following for each recipe item:
ID, description, current value, high and low limits, and engineering units.
3BUR002418-600 A
97
Changing Recipe Values
Section 4 TCL Displays
Changing Recipe Values
Only recipe values can be changed from the Recipe Detail Display. To edit a recipe
value, select the parameter you want to change, type a new value and press Enter.
Any changes to recipe values from the Recipe Detail Display are not permanent.
The changes are temporary and only apply to the current batch.
TCL Array Plot Display
There are two primary ways plot display are configured: the Plot and the Filled Plot.
The Plot display shows data contained in a TCL array as a contiguous trace. As
many as two traces of data can be plotted at one time. The Filled Plot configuration,
Figure 42, is a single trace, filled with a color between the x-axis and the trace line.
TCL Array Plot Format
Plot displays require a TCL floating point array to store the configuration attributes
and plot point values. The array must be large enough to store values for all the
points to be plotted.
Plots and filled plots can have vertical blue lines drawn at user-specified locations.
Plots of this type are called Hybrid Plots. Hybrid plot displays are useful for flat
sheet applications. A TCL hybrid line array is required for the hybrid plot display.
The hybrid line array is a TCL real number array that is 260 elements long.
Using TCL Array Plot
When using the In Plot Array option, the first 10 elements of the array are used as
the plot display's attribute values. All other elements of the array may contain the
plot point values. The points are drawn on the array plot display consecutively from
left to right. Therefore, it is important that you enter the values for the plot points in
the proper elements of the array.
The plot array may give you an inaccessible error on first use. Also, anything that
causes a disconnect with the Connectivity Server will cause error values. Upon
reconnect, inaccessible errors will occur.
98
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Using TCL Array Plot
Figure 42. TCL Array Plot
Context Menu
Use the context menu to perform the following activities:
•
3BUR002418-600 A
Trace 1 and Trace 2 > Configure
This menu is active when using the In Plot Array option during configuration.
The fields can be set as follows:
99
Using TCL Array Plot
Section 4 TCL Displays
Number of Points
This field is used to specify the number of points to be
plotted.
Number of Points + X-Start Position = X-Axis Width
Specifying more points than available will cause a
diagnostic error message and will not display any
points. Specifying less than 25 points will produce a
low resolution plot (the ruler will offset to the nearest
point during selection).
Y-Axis Top and
Y-Axis Top Bottom
This field is used to specify the top and bottom values
of the y-axis.
X-Axis Width
This field is used to specify the width of the x-axis for
the trace in points.
X-Axis Width = Number of Points + X-Start Position
For plot displays, traces #1 and #2 can have different xaxis widths. Both x-axes will always be spread out
between the y-axes.
X-Start Pos
This field is used to specify the point on the x-axis to
start plotting the data pointed to by the respective trace
plot array.
X-Axis Width = Number of Points + X-Start Position
100
•
Trace 1 and Trace 2 > Expand to Half Width
Use this to view one half of the trace.
•
Trace 1 and Trace 2 > Expand to Quarter Width
Use this to view one fourth of the trace.
•
Trace 1 and Trace 2 > Restore
Use this to set the default configuration values. There are separate defaults for
the Plot and Filled Plot displays.
•
Ruler
Use this to show the vertical ruler (checked) or not show the ruler.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 4 TCL Displays
Batch Connectivity to M0D 300
Display Errors
Use this to view Plot Errors that are the result of configuration errors or an array not
being loaded.
Batch Connectivity to M0D 300
When using the MOD-300 Control Systems as part of the System 800xA Batch
Management, the primary operation displays are accessed from the Batch Overview,
Batch History Overview, and Equipment Overview icons. The standard TCL
displays are available for use as secondary displays for the normal control of the
Batch Process. Reference System 800xA Batch Management Operation
(3BUA00145*) for details.
Use the Batch Displays during normal operation to manage the Batch process. The
Batch software handles all TCL state/status combinations. For example, using the
TCL displays to change state from Active to Paused during the S88 RUN State will
cause the Batch Phase to go to the S88 Abort State with an Error, in this case 'TCL
Paused by User'. Let the Batch Manager software manage the State/Status of the
Sequence being used as a MOD_PHASE.
When there is not a valid S88 State change that can be used for recovery, then the
TCL displays can be used to recover the process.
Additional notes:
•
Within batch, the MOD Phase Sequence is a TCL Sequence adapted to provide
ISA S88 State Functionality. The MOD Phase Sequence is identified as a
MOD_PHASE object in the Process Portal Control Structure.
•
When loading sequences from the Unit Detail Display, note that loading of the
MOD_PHASE TCL Sequences is handled automatically.
•
Direct access of a sequence detail is possible from the MOD_SEQUENCE
object or the MOD_PHASE object.
•
State, Mode, and Status is managed automatically as per the ISA S88 State
model. The State, Mode, and Status can be modified within the TCL as needed
to recover from an Abnormal Condition. The Batch PFC Status display's Error
field will indicate when an abnormal condition requires manual intervention
via the TCL displays.
3BUR002418-600 A
101
Batch Connectivity to M0D 300
102
Section 4 TCL Displays
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 5 TLL Displays
Operational Displays for Taylor Ladder Logic
This section describes the runtime support displays for Taylor Ladder Logic (TLL).
These displays are used to monitor TLL segments and data structures. Each data
structure has its own type of display (Counter, Register, Timer, IOPoint, File and
Sequencer).
The Segment, Counter, Register, Timer and IOPoint displays all include a search
feature. To use this feature, type in the search string (can be any string segment) and
then select the search arrows to search up (left) or down (right) from the current
location. The current match will be colored green (blue on Segment display).
Segment Display
The Segment Display, Figure 43, is used to monitor and control the execution of
Taylor Ladder Logic (see the TLL User’s Guide). This display is accessed by
selecting a Ladder Logic object and then selecting MOD300 TLL Segment from
the context menu.
The Segment Display can be used to:
•
Load and remove segments.
•
Turn TLL scanning on and off.
•
Debug segments by forcing the I/O points to specified conditions.
•
Access displays for the TLL Data Structures (timers, counters, and so on).
The body of the display is a ladder logic diagram. In the left margin, the segment
and rung numbers of each ladder rung are indicated. Line numbers are assigned
according to the line number used in AdvaBuild. Some line numbers are without a
rung because block instructions formerly used two lines for display purposes.
3BUR002418-600 A
103
Segment Display
Section 5 TLL Displays
Figure 43. Segment Display
The power rails are displayed in red because they are always powered. The rungs
and branches are displayed in red if they have power, or in white if they do not. The
elements are labeled with the name that was entered for them when the segment was
built. Examine On Symbols shows either the state of the contact or the data quality
of the input. Timers and counters show either their enable/disable condition or
whether they are still running. Remarks are displayed on their own rung. A closed
segment also closes its data access subscription (does not collect data in background
when closed).
File instructions, Figure 44, allow the ladder logic to transfer data from registers to
files, files to registers, and from one file to another. Each instruction has a counter
associated with it to provide an index into a file for a particular element (counter
faceplates must be accessed from the counter display). The counters are
incremented or decremented by the Ladder Logic to provide the proper index for the
Register to File Move and File to Register Move Instructions. The entire contents of
a file is moved by the File to File Move Instruction. Not done is indicated by ND on
the File to File symbol.
104
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 5 TLL Displays
Segment Display Fields and Buttons
Figure 44. TLL Segment Display File to File Symbol
Segment Display Fields and Buttons
Device
The Device field indicates the TLL name in a specific
node or controller. This name is defined on the Ladder
Logic Device object during database configuration.
Scan
This selection box is used to toggle the scan on and off.
To toggle, click on the Scan box. The scan is on when
the box is checked.
Force
The Force field is a display-only field. It indicates
whether any I/O point in the segments is being forced by
operator command (as read from the database).
Load Segment
This field is used to add segments to the node or
controller. (The segments must already exist in a
loadable form for the node or controller.)
To add a segment, select the Load Segment field and
enter the number of the segment. Press <Return>.
The information on the screen does not change after the
load unless the elements on the screen are associated
with the newly loaded segment. Otherwise, you have to
use the scroll bar to view the newly loaded segment.
Remove Segment
This field removes segments from the node or controller.
To remove a segment, select the Remove Segment field
and enter the number of the segment. Press <Return>.
3BUR002418-600 A
105
Faceplates for Program Elements
Section 5 TLL Displays
Search:
Use this field to specify an element you wish to find
within the Segment display starting with the currently
open segment or the first segment if none are open.
To find an element, select the search field and enter the
name of the element you want to find. If you do not know
the full name, enter as much of the name as you know.
Click on the right arrow button to search forward or on
the left arrow button to search backward. The item you
put into the Search field stays there until you replace it
with a new item. Changing the search item causes the
search to start at the beginning of the segment, if open.
If an item is found in a closed segment, you are asked if
you want to search in that segment. Selecting No ends
the search. The search does not wrap back to the first
segment. To start from the beginning, open the first
segment and start the search.
Segment Buttons
Segment
Rung
Use the segment box to switch between the compressed
and expanded segment view. In compressed view, no
rungs are displayed and no data access for that segment
occurs. In expanded view, all rungs for the segment are
visible, and all data access to support the segment is
enabled.
By default, all segments are closed. Only one segment
can be open at a time. The ability to open all segments is
not implemented to prevent communication overload.
Faceplates for Program Elements
Faceplates provide detailed information about selected ladder elements. To call up a
faceplate, click on a program element. Counter faceplates must be accessed from the
counter display and not from file instruction elements.
TLL faceplate values may update while the user is modifying the edit (text) box
fields.
TLL I/O Point Faceplate
The TLL I/O Point faceplate allows you to debug segments by specifying states for
the AC parameter of I/O points.
106
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 5 TLL Displays
Faceplates for Program Elements
To change AC, you must first put the I/O point into a forced state by clicking on the
Forced YES button. Then you can change the status between ON and OFF or
OPEN and CLOSED. When a point is forced, it affects the value in the segment
only. The actual condition of the point in the field is not affected.
The character F is used to indicate all points that are forced, Figure 45. Forcing is
also supported via the I/O Point Display. For more information, refer to I/O Point
Display on page 115.
Figure 45. Indication of a Forced Point
TLL Timer Faceplate
You can change the Preset, Value, and Enable in the TLL Timer faceplate. The
format for Preset and Value time entries is described in Timer Display on page 112.
TLL Counter Faceplate
You can change the Preset, Value, and Enable in the TLL Counter faceplate. For
more information on the TLL Counter faceplate, refer to Counter Display on page
110.
TLL Register Faceplate
You can change the Value in the TLL Register faceplate. For more information on
the TLL Register faceplate, refer to Register Display on page 108.
3BUR002418-600 A
107
Register Display
Section 5 TLL Displays
Register Display
The Register Display, Figure 46, contains a list of the registers, places in memory
that are used to store values, in the device. This display is accessed by selecting a
Ladder Logic object and then selecting MOD300 TLL Register from the context
menu.
Figure 46. TLL Register Display
The following fields can be edited on this display:
108
Value
You can change the value of a register by selecting the Value
field for the register, entering the new value, then pressing
ENTER. This change is then applied.
Description
Use this field to modify the associated description.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 5 TLL Displays
Register Faceplate
Search is case sensitive and will find any partial string in the Register column. A
match is colored green. The search arrows will find the previous or next match.
Register Faceplate
Each register can have a faceplate. Select the register (left click) to get the faceplate
or use the context menu to get the faceplate of an imported register as shown in
Figure 47. You can change the Description and value from the faceplate.
Use context menu to select faceplate for a register.
Figure 47. TLL Register Faceplate
3BUR002418-600 A
109
Counter Display
Section 5 TLL Displays
Counter Display
The Counter Display, Figure 48, contains a list of the counters in the device. This
display is accessed by selecting a Ladder Logic object (MOD_LL_DEV) and then
selecting MOD300 TLL Counter from the context menu.
TLL counters can count by increments of one. Instructions in the programs can
cause them to count up or down, reset, or go to their configured preset values.
Counters can count as high as 2,147,483,647. Counters are required by a number of
instructions such as file instructions and sequencer instructions. Down counting
starts at the Preset and is finished when the count Value = 0. Up counting starts at
the count Value = 0 and is finished when equal to the Preset.
Figure 48. TLL Counter Display
110
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 5 TLL Displays
Counter Faceplate
The following fields can be edited on this display:
Value
You can change the value of a counter by selecting the
Value field for the counter, entering the new value, then
pressing ENTER. This change is logged.
Preset
You can change the preset of a counter (the value counted
up to or down from) by selecting the Preset field for the
counter, entering the new value, then pressing ENTER. This
change is logged.
Description
Use this field to modify the associated description.
Counter Faceplate
Each counter can have a faceplate, Figure 49. Select the counter (left click) to get
the faceplate or use the context menu to get the faceplate of an imported counter.
The counter can be enabled (YES) or disabled (NO) from the faceplate. You can
also change the Description, Preset and Value.
Figure 49. TLL Counter Faceplate
3BUR002418-600 A
111
Timer Display
Section 5 TLL Displays
Timer Display
The Timer Display, Figure 50, contains a list of the timers in the device. This
display is accessed by selecting a Ladder Logic object and then selecting MOD300
TLL Timer from the context menu.
TLL timers can time with a configurable time base that can be either 1.0, 0.1, or
0.01 seconds (displayed on faceplate). The timers are under program control and
can be started, stopped and reset by program instructions. They can time to values as
large as 999 hours. A timer is configured to time up or down.
Figure 50. TLL Timer Display
112
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 5 TLL Displays
Timer Display
The following fields can be edited on this display:
Preset
Value
The Preset and Value fields are displayed to the hundredth
place. For example, 001:20:15.25 is one hour, twenty
minutes, fifteen and twenty-five hundredths seconds. Your
entry should be within the resolution of the time base. If it is
not, the system automatically rounds it to the nearest
multiple of the time base. You can change the preset or
value of a timer by selecting the Preset or Value field for the
timer, entering the new value, then pressing ENTER. The
changes are logged.
Enable
This field is used to enable and disable the timer. You can
change between YES (enable) and NO (disable) by
selecting the Enable field for the timer, clicking on the
appropriate Enable button, then pressing ENTER. The
changes are logged.
Description
Use this field to modify the associated description.
Time entries can be made in the following formats:
•
One colon preceded by one or two digits means minutes and seconds.
Examples:
30:05
12:40
•
One colon preceded by three digits means hours and minutes.
Example:
010:15
•
10 hours 15 minutes
Two colons indicate hours and minutes.
Examples:
8:07:
12:16:10.2
3BUR002418-600 A
30 minutes 5 seconds
12 minutes 40 seconds
8 hours, 7 minutes
12 hours, 16 minutes, 10.2 seconds
113
Timer Faceplate
•
Section 5 TLL Displays
A period indicates seconds.
Examples:
6.
.5
6 seconds
.5 seconds
Timer Faceplate
Each timer can have a faceplate, Figure 51. Select the timer (left click) to get the
faceplate or use the context menu to get the faceplate of an imported timer. The
timer can be enabled (YES) or disabled (NO) from the faceplate.
Figure 51. TLL Timer Faceplate
114
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 5 TLL Displays
I/O Point Display
I/O Point Display
The I/O Point Display, Figure 52, contains a list of the I/O points of the node or
controller. This display is accessed by selecting a Ladder Logic object and then
selecting MOD300 TLL I/O Point from the context menu.
TLL uses digital input (contact) and output (coil) points that are local to the
controller or node. For ladder logic I/O points that use PLC functionality, only
inputs are supported.
Figure 52. TLL I/O Point Display
I/O Point Faceplate
Each I/O point can have a faceplate, Figure 53. Select the I/O point (left click) to get
the faceplate or use the context menu to get the faceplate of an imported I/O point.
For S100 I/O points, the faceplate shows the Channel, Lan and Block number. For
3BUR002418-600 A
115
I/O Point Faceplate
Section 5 TLL Displays
S800 I/O points, the faceplate shows the Channel number. The following fields can
be edited on this display:
Status
The Status field gives the current value of the AC parameter
of the point. It can be either Open or Closed for a contact, or
On or Off for a coil. Change the status by selecting the
Status field for the point, then selecting the appropriate
status from the pull down list. Status changes are logged.
Forced
When the Forced field is YES, you can determine how the
value of a points status affects the segment since the
change is not sent to the actual I/O point. When the Forced
field is NO, status field changes affects the actual I/O point.
You can change between YES and NO by selecting the
Forced field for the point, then selecting the appropriate
Forced value from the pull down list. Changes to this field
are not logged.
Description
Use this field to modify the associated description.
Figure 53. TLL I/O Point Faceplate
116
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 5 TLL Displays
File Display
File Display
Each file in the device has a File Display which lists up to 128 values for use by the
sequencer, Figure 54. This display is accessed by selecting a Ladder Logic Device
object and then selecting MOD300 TLL File from the context menu and then
selecting a specific file from the File List.
Figure 54. File Display
Use the drop down file list to switch to a display for another file in the device. Select
the Value field to change the values of the items in the file. All changes are logged.
When changing a value, type in the new value and press ENTER. The maximum
value allowed is an eight digit integer. For control purposes, 16777215 (FFFFFF
hex) is the full access upper value. During TLL execution, the sequencer
instructions translate the entry into a bit pattern to load into or compare with I/O
points. It is possible to see values beyond what you can enter here because the
3BUR002418-600 A
117
Sequencer Display
Section 5 TLL Displays
LL_FILE template allows a base 10 integer, from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits);
however, it will be displayed as a signed 32 bit number (-1).
Sequencer Display
The Sequencer Display, Figure 55, has multiple pages, with one page for each step
in the sequencer. This display is accessed by selecting a Ladder Logic Device object
and then selecting MOD300 TLL Sequencer from the context menu and then a
specific sequence from the Sequence List.
Figure 55. Sequencer Display
A sequencer is a series of up to 128 steps. Each step is a list of as many as 32 I/O
points. The I/O points listed in a sequencer step are manipulated in one way or
another by sequencer program instructions. One type of sequencer instruction
causes the values of input points to be read into a file. Another instruction causes the
values in a file to be sent to output points.
118
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 5 TLL Displays
TLL Device Logged Changes
Use the Step field to display the screen for a particular step of the sequencer. Use
the up/down arrow of the Step field to display the screen for the previous/next step
of the sequencer. Enter a step value to go to a particular step.
You can switch to a display for another sequencer in the device by selecting one
from the Sequencer field.
To change a value, select the value field for the Item to be changed, type in a valid
I/O point (no spaces), and then press ENTER. To delete a value, clear the field and
then press ENTER.
TLL Device Logged Changes
There are several changes that can be made to items on the Database Summary
Displays. Almost all of these changes are logged. For example, if your system is
configured with a logging printer, a typical message would be:
REG1
SEQ1 MASK REGISTERAC CHANGED FROM 115 TO 315
TLL Messages
TLL messages are treated like TCL messages and can be displayed on the TCL
Message Display for a unit. TLL messages are configured on the Ladder Logic
Message Templet as described in the TLL User’s Guide. Units receiving TLL
messages during runtime are specified on the TLL Configuration Area Templets.
3BUR002418-600 A
119
TLL Messages
120
Section 5 TLL Displays
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
Status Displays Overview
Status displays contain system and subsystem level information that allow you to
identify detectable fault conditions, monitor general status and performance, change
process outputs directly for testing, and control the status of redundancy. The
displays include: System Status, Subsystem Status (AC460, AC410, Controller
Node, Turbo Node), Diagnostic Message, and System Performance. See Section 7,
I/O Displays for: S800 and S100 Device Overview and Status, PROFIBUS, TRIO
and Direct I/O. For additional information on diagnostic displays for the Advant
Controller subsystems, refer to the Advant Controller 410 User’s Guide and/or the
Advant Controller 460 User’s Guide. For all other subsystems, refer to the
appropriate hardware user’s guide user manual.
You are alerted to the presence of a diagnostic message by the Diagnostic Message
List of the base product as described in System 800xA Operations (3BSE036904*).
Entries identifying an operator action on the diagnostic displays are relayed to the
appropriate logging device.
Color coding of data shown on the diagnostic displays, including the labels on the
message targets/buttons, is as follows:
•
Red indicates an error.
•
Green a good report.
•
Yellow a possible problem.
•
White a neutral fact.
3BUR002418-600 A
121
System Status Display
Section 6 Status Displays
System Status Display
The System Status Display, Figure 56, shows the current status of all subsystems
(nodes) recognized on the DCN. Each subsystem status icon lists the subsystem
name, device address, device type, media state, device state, and controller status
(Controller types only). The display has a large icon, small icon and a report view
available through the context menu (shown). The Address and Type columns may
be sorted by clicking on the column heading. Module message and performance
displays can be viewed right clicking in the Status column (shown).
Figure 56. System Status Display, Report View
122
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
System Status Display
Subsystem Types
The available subsystem types (shown above icon on icon views and in the heading
line of the corresponding Subsystem or I/O Status Display) include:
ADVANT STATION
Advant Station
COMPACT STATION Advant Controller 410 (AC410) Subsystem
PROCESS STATION
Advant Controller 460 (AC460) Subsystem
CONSOLE
Console Subsystem
CONTROLLER
Controller Subsystem
DATA PROCESSOR
Turbo Subsystem
DCN2DCN
DCN/DCN Interface
GATEWAY
Ethernet Interface
UNKNOWN
Subsystem not identifiable
Address
The device number address for an Advant Station, AC410, AC460, Console, Data
Processor Subsystem, DCN/DCN Interface, or Gateway Interface is determined by
configuration. Subdevice numbers, for the Controller Subsystem only, are
determined by the module position in the controller card file and are shown in the
Subsystem Status Display.
Subsystem Name
The subsystem name shown for each icon of the System Status Display is the 21
character name entered in the TEMPLET NAME field when that subsystem was
configured.
Subsystem Status
The status of each subsystem DCN connection is indicated by its color coded status
boxes. The number of status boxes depends on the type of subsystem. CONSOLE,
DATA PROCESSOR, and GATEWAY icons contain two status boxes that indicate
the status of D/M Module 1 and 2. CONTROLLER icons contain two status boxes
that indicate the status of D/F Module 1 and 2 and up to 12 status boxes that indicate
3BUR002418-600 A
123
Subsystem Status Displays
Section 6 Status Displays
the status of Control Modules 1 through 12. ADVANT STATION icons contain two
status boxes that indicate the status of the Real Time Accelerator Board. AC410 and
AC460 icons contain two status boxes that indicate the status of the DCN interface
submodules, and AC460 icons have up to three additional status boxes that indicate
the status of controllers.
State Definitions
The system state executive indicates the current status of a device or subdevice
through the following state definitions:
Table 6. State Definitions
STATE
COLOR
DEFINITION
Blank
No Control Module configured.
ACTIVE
Green
Device or subdevice is running.
AVAILABLE
Cyan
Program has downloaded and database is
downloading.
DOWN
Red
Fatal failure (that is, communications has failed)
or device/subdevice may be down.
HOLD
Cyan
Hardware error (that is, digital input, analog
input) or configured hold to allow other Control
Module with softwired data to become active.
IMPAIRED
Cyan
Backup Control Module running but is not yet
rebooted.
READY
Yellow
Database download is complete; normal state
for backup controller.
UNKNOWN
Red
State is not known.
Subsystem Status Displays
The Subsystem Status Displays provide information on the node’s condition.
124
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
AC460 Subsystem Status Display
AC460 Subsystem Status Display
The AC460 Subsystem Status Display, Figure 57, provides: node address and name;
controller address, name and status (active and backup); status of power supplies;
TC520 Monitor Status; fan and auxiliary input status; status for PM510 Processor
Module Cards and whether a card is currently a primary or backup; status and
address for DCN, TRIO, MVI, AF 100 - S800 I/O and S100 I/O submodules; TRIO,
S100, S800 and PROFIBUS logical LAN numbers; MVI Port type and status (A/B).
Select a controller to perform Switchover, Hard Reset or Reset for Upgrade
activities. Use the context menu to select the Diagnostic Message and System
Performance displays for a specific subdevice. Select the S800, S100, PROFIBUS,
or TRIO Overview (LAN) display by selecting the submodule display target.
Figure 57. AC460 Subsystem Status Display (Process Station)
3BUR002418-600 A
125
AC460 Subsystem Status Display
Section 6 Status Displays
PROFIBUS Interface
The status of the PROFIBUS Interface will show if it is active, failed or missing. In
addition, you can select the PROFIBUS LAN display by selecting its display target.
TRIO Interface
The status of the TRIO LAN submodule will show if it is active, failed or missing.
Select the TRIO Lan display by selecting its display target.
S800 I/O Interface
The status of the S800 I/O Interface submodule will show if it is active, failed or
missing. In addition, you can select the S800 Lan Overview display for a module by
selecting its display target.
MVI Interface
MVI (Multi Vendor Interface) is redundant at the port level for PLC I/O. MVI
redundancy is determined by the controlling application (client) program.
Redundant ports may reside on the same, or on a different MVI submodule.
Therefore, no MVI submodule is considered to be a “backup” for another. The
status of the MVI submodule will show if it is active, failed or missing.
DCN Interface
The DCN interface is similar to the TRIO interface, in that both are considered to be
active simultaneously, with no preference for either one as primary.
TC520 Monitor Status
The TC520 Status Module information includes the power supply status, fan status
and user-defined auxiliary status inputs (available from the front panel of the TC520
status monitor). The status can be either DOWN (red) or ACTIVE (green) for all the
TC520 functions. If the TC520 monitor status is DOWN, then the status for all the
other TC520 functions will be UNKNOWN (yellow). The rectangles for the userdefined auxiliary status inputs (A1, A2, B1, B2) are colored green when active, and
colored red when inactive.
126
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
AC460 Subsystem Status Display
S100 Interface
S100 is redundant at the device level. A device’s redundant mate may reside on the
same, or on a different S100 LAN. When redundant, both LANs are active,
therefore, no S100 LAN interface is considered to be a “backup” for another. The
status of the S100 LAN submodule will show if it is active, failed or missing. In
addition, you can select the S100 Overview Display for a module by selecting its
display target.
The S100 I/O LAN status show the condition of the CI540 and the LAN
communications.
ACTIVE = Primary Redundant LAN is OK
READY = Back-up Redundant LAN is OK
BC DN = Communication to DSBC 175 Bus Extender has a problem
DOWN = CI540 Bus Extender Master has failed
Push-buttons on AC460 Subsystem Status Display
When a controller is selected, three (3) command push-buttons are displayed,
Figure 58. They allow the user to issue commands to the controller in order to
perform a software upgrade. When a command push-button is selected, a
confirmation is required.
Figure 58. Command Push-buttons
See the Advant ® Controller 460 User’s Guide for a detailed description on how
to perform an on-line upgrade.
3BUR002418-600 A
127
AC460 Subsystem Status Display
Section 6 Status Displays
The descriptions for the three command push-buttons follows:
•
RESET for UPGRADE
The RESET for UPGRADE push-button is used to reset a backup controller
and reboot into the “UPGRDE” state. The following restrictions apply for this
command:
•
–
The RESET for UPGRADE command is used to reset backup controllers
only and cannot be invoked from a primary controller. This prevents
primary controllers from being reset by the user.
–
The command is not actually sent until the CONFIRM push-button is
selected.
–
The CANCEL push-button can be used to clear the RESET for
UPGRADE.
SWITCHOVER
The SWITCHOVER push-button is used to force the switchover of a primary
controller to a backup controller (that is loaded with a different version of
software). The following restrictions apply for this command:
128
–
If the backup controller is not in the “UPGRDE” state, SWITCHOVER
cannot be selected. This prevents switchover from being attempted for
backup controllers that are not in the correct state.
–
A five (5) second delay after selection of this push-button occurs before
other push-buttons can be selected. This prevents switchover of different
controllers in the same AC 460 subsystems from overlapping.
–
The command is not actually sent until the CONFIRM push-button is
selected.
–
The CANCEL push-button can be used to clear the fact that this pushbutton was selected.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
•
AC460 Subsystem Status Display
HARD RESET
The HARD RESET push-button can be used to reset any controller on the AC
460 subsystem display. Resetting a controller through this push-button has the
same effect as depressing the “Enter” button on the controller’s front panel.
This button must not be used during the on-line upgrade procedure.
The following restrictions apply for this command:
•
–
The command is not actually sent until the CONFIRM push-button is
selected.
–
The CANCEL push-button can be used to clear the fact that this pushbutton was selected.
CONFIRM
Because there is a need to prevent inadvertent selection of a push-button from
causing unintended controller resets and switchovers, the CONFIRM pushbutton is used to provide a confirmation process for the “RESET for
UPGRADE”, “HARD RESET”, and “SWITCHOVER” functions. The actual
reset or switch request is not sent until the CONFIRM push-button is selected.
•
CANCEL
The CANCEL push-button is used to clear the fact that any other push-button
was selected. You may then Quit or select another command button.
3BUR002418-600 A
129
AC410 Subsystem Status Display
Section 6 Status Displays
AC410 Subsystem Status Display
The AC410 Subsystem Status Display, Figure 59, provides: node address and name;
DCN status; PM150 Controller address, name and status; and TRIO and S100
submodule status and logical LAN numbers. See the AC460 for a description of the
TRIO Interface, S100 I/O Interface, S800 I/O Interface, MVI interface and DCN
interface.
Figure 59. AC410 Subsystem Status Display (Compact Station)
130
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
Controller Node Subsystem Status Display
Controller Node Subsystem Status Display
The Controller Subsystem Status Display, Figure 60, provides information on the
specified node's general condition. The first line of the display below the Subsystem
Status title provides the device number, type and current state of the Controller
Subsystem. The other areas and activities are described below.
Figure 60. Controller Subsystem Status Display (Controller)
Controller Subsystem Status Display CCR Requests
The Redundancy Request button is used to make Control Card Redundancy (CCR)
requests for the selected Control Module. When one of the associated commands is
selected, the request and the currently selected subdevice number are shown and a
prompt is displayed requesting confirmation of the selected action. If the action and
the subdevice are correct, select Confirm to send the request. Otherwise, you can
select a different command or subdevice. Only when Confirm is selected
3BUR002418-600 A
131
Controller Node Subsystem Status Display
Section 6 Status Displays
immediately after the request to confirm is the request executed. You can select
Cancel at any time to abort a request that has not yet been confirmed.
A Control Card redundancy request is initiated by selecting the status block for the
desired Control Module. (The block is highlighted to show selection.) Next, you
select the Redundancy Request button to bring up a set of commands described
below:
Establish Redundancy - Establishes redundancy.
Terminate Redundancy - Also terminates the Redundancy Auto-Establish
mode.
Start Controller - Used to get out of the READY state.
Hard Reset - Causes the Control Module to reset. This command is similar to
pulling the Control Module out of the slot and then re-inserting it.
Fail Over - Requests fail over of the Primary Control Module to the Backup
Control Module. If the fail over is unsuccessful, the Primary Control Module
continues to function as if no request to fail over occurred.
Switch Back - Requests switch back from the Backup Control Module to the
Primary Control Module.
Confirm - Confirms and sends request to the subdevice.
Cancel - Cancels any request not yet confirmed.
When one of the above commands is selected (except Confirm and Cancel), the
request and the subdevice number are shown and a prompt is displayed requesting
confirmation of the selected action. If the action and selected module are correct,
then select Confirm. Otherwise, select a different action and/or module.
Controller Subsystem Status Display Requests
The Display Request button is used to access a TRIO
LAN display or a Controller I/O (Direct I/O) display
(only one or the other can be available). First select an
available controller, then select the Display Request
button and then select the appropriate display.
Alternately, you can select a specific Remote I/O or
Direct I/O in the Diagnostic area.
132
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
Controller Node Subsystem Status Display
Controller Subsystem Status Display Description
The main areas on the Controller Subsystem Display are:
CONTROLLERS
Status and redundancy information for up to 12 Control Modules are shown in
individual status blocks whose arrangement corresponds to the slots in the
Controller Card File(s) of the subsystem. If the subsystem employs 3-1
controller redundancy, blocks 4, 8 and 12 show the status of the backup
controllers and all other blocks show the status of the primary controllers. If the
subsystem employs 11-1 controller redundancy, block 4 shows the status of the
backup controller and all other blocks show the status of the primary
controllers.
A blank status block indicates that there is no Control Module configured for
that slot in the Controller Card File. If a status block contains only the status,
data in the Control Module itself could not be accessed. Each field in a status
block is a target. When selected, it is highlighted and that Control Module
becomes the object of subsequent redundancy and display requests. If a target
in the status block for a Backup Control Module which is emulating a Primary
Control Module, or a Primary Control Module which is being emulated by a
Backup Control Module is selected, the subdevice ID is the modules current
pseudonym. (For example, if Control Module 4 is emulating Control Module 3,
their subdevice IDs are 03 and 04, respectively.)
The controller status is shown in the fields of its respective status block as:
•
•
3BUR002418-600 A
STATUS
–
?????? - No status received (Red).
–
UNKNOWN (Red).
–
DOWN (Red).
–
READY (Yellow).
–
IMPAIRED (Yellow).
–
ACTIVE (Green).
–
AVAILABLE (Cyan).
REDUNDANCY
133
Controller Node Subsystem Status Display
Section 6 Status Displays
–
?????????? - No status received (Red).
–
UNKNOWN (Red).
–
FAILED (Red).
–
EMULATING - Back-up controller only (Yellow).
–
NOT AVAIL (Yellow).
–
LOST (Yellow).
–
TERMINATED - Controller only (Yellow).
–
READY (Yellow).
–
ACTIVE (Green).
–
EMULATED - (Yellow).
After redundancy has been LOST, Control Modules attempt to re-establish
redundancy every 30 seconds. This operation is similar to the establish
redundancy request except no diagnostic is generated. The redundancy state
remains LOST for five unsuccessful attempts. After the fifth unsuccessful
attempt to re-establish redundancy, the redundancy status becomes
TERMINATED. If redundancy is re-established before the fifth attempt, the
REDUNDANCY AUTO-ESTABLISH AFTER x TRIES diagnostic message is
generated. Once the auto-establish mode is entered, it remains active even if a
manual Redundancy Request > Establish Redundancy request causes a
transition to the FAILED state. It can be stopped by selecting Redundancy
Request > Terminate Redundancy.
•
•
134
PBUS STATUS
–
??????? - No status received (Red).
–
DOWN (Red).
–
UNKNOWN (Red).
–
UP (Green).
BACKUP ENAB
–
NO (Yellow).
–
YES (Green).
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
–
Controller Node Subsystem Status Display
BACK-UP MEMORY
Status information for up to three Backup Memory Modules per Controller
Subsystem are shown in individual status blocks to the right of the status blocks
for the controllers they back up. Each field in a status block is a target. When
selected, it is highlighted and that Backup Memory Module becomes the object
of subsequent redundancy and display requests. (The highlighted backup
controller status block(s) in the CONTROLLERS area indicate(s) which set or
sets of up to four controllers are backed up by that backup memory module.)
Backup Memory Modules are assigned pseudo-subdevice numbers of 13 (OD),
14 (OE) and 15 (OF) since they are not actually on the DCN or F-Bus. The
only meaningful displays for use with Backup Memory Modules are the
Diagnostic Message Displays.
The backup memory status is shown in the status block as:
•
•
STATUS
–
?????? - Unknown (Red).
–
UNKNOWN (Red).
–
NOT AVAIL (Red).
–
ACTIVE (Green).
BACKUP STATUS
–
?????? - No status received (Red).
–
FAILED (Red).
–
UNKNOWN (Red).
–
ACTIVE (Yellow).
–
READY (Green).
D/F
Each of these two fields is a target. When selected, it is highlighted and that
D/M Module becomes the object of subsequent redundancy and display
requests. D/M Modules are assigned pseudo-subdevice numbers of 30 (1E) and
31 (1F), rather than the subdevice number of 0 which is indicated on the
System Status Display, in order to distinguish messages from each D/F. The
3BUR002418-600 A
135
Controller Node Subsystem Status Display
Section 6 Status Displays
only meaningful displays for use with D/F Modules are the Diagnostic
Message Displays.
The D/F status, shown in the D/F fields, is either DOWN (Red) or ACTIVE
(Green).
DIAGNOSTICS
The status of power up diagnostics for each module accessible on the DCN is
reported in this field. This area is always the Page Forward and Page Back
region.
The possible diagnostic errors for the Control Module, Backup Memory
Module and D/F Module are:
136
–
RAM Error (fatal error).
–
PROM Checksum Error (fatal error).
–
Timer Error (timer is not within a set tolerance during a 10 ms delay).
–
Watchdog Timer Error (on-board watchdog timer times out in under 350
ms or takes longer than 410 ms).
–
Bus Error Handling Error (system getting bus errors on valid addresses or
not getting errors on invalid addresses).
–
Parity Handling Error (system is not correcting a one bit error or not
detecting a two bit error).
–
D/M Error (M/F cannot communicate with the D/M or the D/M has an
error).
–
XMEM Not Supported.
–
Unknown Error.
–
Analog Output Error.
–
Analog Input Error (error reading high or low reference channel or
standard channel).
–
Digital Input Error (error reading high input, low input, or unable to get
interrupt).
–
Digital Output Error.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
Turbo/Console Node Subsystem Status Display
With the exception of diagnostic detection of an output channel failure, all of
the above failures to a Control Module automatically initiate the fail over
process. A failed output channel is configured to perform one of the following
four actions based upon a detected diagnostic failure:
–
Continue processing the loop as configured.
–
Turn the Output FCM off.
–
Fail over.
–
Turn the loop off.
If, after a fatal diagnostic error, fail over is unsuccessful, either because
redundancy is not available or the switch to back-up did not occur, power to the
outputs of the failed Control Module is turned off. This is accomplished by a
hardware timer that resets the outputs approximately 200 milliseconds after the
card available signal is turned off. If in the HOLD position, the last outputs are
maintained. Otherwise the output values go to zero. If a failure is the result of a
shorted transistor on the digital output, transfer to the Backup Control Module,
whose I/O is paralleled with the Primary, results in the Backup failing also.
This causes the Backup to reset and output power is turned off.
Diagnostics detect if a relay in the analog signal path fails, but is unable to
detect the failure of a relay in the digital signal path.
Turbo/Console Node Subsystem Status Display
The Turbo/Console Node Subsystem Status Display, Figure 61, provides
information on the specified node’s general condition. The first line of the display
below the Subsystem Status title provides the device number, type and current state
of the Multibus Subsystem. The other areas and activities are described below.
3BUR002418-600 A
137
Turbo/Console Node Subsystem Status Display
Section 6 Status Displays
Figure 61. Turbo Node Subsystem Status Display (Data Processor)
SIM
The current status data, reported by the System Integrity Module (SIM) for the
specified subsystem, is shown in this field. Buttons are also available for controlling
the Annunciator, the Contact output, and erasing the SIM.
SIM ERROR LOG
The current error log, as reported by the System Integrity Module for the specified
subsystem, is shown in this field. Note that only fatal errors are shown. The
hexadecimal number to the left of the colon is a unique hardware, software and SIM
status code identifier. The set of four hexadecimal numbers to the right of the colon
describes the specific type of error associated with the unique status code identifier.
138
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
Turbo/Console Node Subsystem Status Display
Refer to your Subsystem Status and Diagnostics user manual for descriptions of the
codes and their meanings.
DIAGNOSTICS
The status of power up diagnostics for each module in the subsystem is reported in
this field. A description and the I/0 address of each module found in the subsystem
is provided. Refer to your Subsystem Status and Diagnostics user manual for a list
of the possible I/0 module base addresses.
When the System Integrity Module (SIM) is missing or not active, the message
NOT AVAILABLE is displayed in the SIM and SIM ERROR LOG areas.
When the subsystem includes remote I/O, Figure 62, then Remote I/O rows show
the LAN number. This number is the one configured in the node not in the database.
Figure 62. Turbo Node Subsystem Status Diagnostic Area with TRIO
Subsystem Status Display Operation
Buttons available and the actions performed by each include:
ANNUNCIATOR
Toggles the SIM Annunciator state ON or OFF.
CONTACT OUTPUT
Toggles the SIM Contact Output state SET or RESET.
ERASE SIM
Clears current error memory locations 01 through C8 on
the SIM.
3BUR002418-600 A
139
Diagnostic Message Display
Section 6 Status Displays
Diagnostic Message Display
If the system is configured with multiple connectivity pairs user will receive
duplicate diagnostic messages. The original diagnostic message and duplicate
messages if any can be acknowledged.
The Diagnostic Messages Display, Figure 63, shows all messages reported and filed
as a diagnostic failure by a device/subdevice of the MOD control system (both
system software and system hardware) along with an indication of the time,
frequency and type. A font selection allows you to display large, medium or small
fonts and consequently fewer or more lines in the main portion of the display.
Colors are assigned to each message type as defined below:
Color Indication
Red
Diagnostic Message Type
Fatal (F) and Error (E)
Yellow
Warning (W)
Green
Informational Status (S)
Figure 63. Diagnostic Message Display
140
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
Diagnostic Message Display
Device Identification
The first line of the Diagnostic Message Display provides the device/subdevice
number, type, and state of the device.
Archive Messages
The total number of records stored in the disk archive file is shown as a percentage
of the total size of the archive in the MESSAGE mode, or as an exact number of
messages in the ARCHIVE mode. Regardless of the mode, the number of records is
shown in yellow if the file is 75 to 90 percent full and red if over 90 percent full.
This serves to indicate when the oldest messages in the archive are in danger of
being lost. This occurs because the archive has a fixed size, and if it is full (2999
messages) the oldest message is erased to make room for a new message. It is not
necessary to do anything about this condition unless there have been problems
which require future examination of messages that are now in the archive.
Diagnostic Messages/Archive Display Description
The main fields on the Diagnostic Messages/Archive Display are:
TIME
Shows the date and time of the most recent occurrence.
#
minutes.
Shows the number of occurrences within an interval of up to 10
DEVSUB
Shows the device/subdevice ID from which the message originated.
DESCRIPTION Shows the message text and severity. The first time a message
occurs, it is archived with a frequency count of 1 and saved in local memory. Each
time the same message occurs again, the frequency count increments in the local
copy. On the display, indication that a message is being counted in local memory is
shown by a greater than sign (>) in the first column. Ten minutes after the first
occurrence, or when flushed from local memory to make room for newer messages,
the message is archived with its final time and count (if more than one) and removed
from local memory. If the same message occurs again, the process starts over. The
severity of each message is indicated by the letter to its right and by a color as
follows (default colors indicated):
F (Fatal)
Red - A fatal error occurred to the node (which causes fail over in
Control Modules).
3BUR002418-600 A
141
Diagnostic Message Display
E (Error)
running.
Section 6 Status Displays
Red - An error occurred which prevents an individual package from
W (Warning) Yellow - An abnormal event occurred which does not prevent
anything from running.
S (Success)
Green - A procedure completed successfully.
Diagnostic Messages Display Targets
Additional fields/targets available on this display and their use are:
OPERATOR By default, OPERATOR messages are displayed (those which cause
the DIAG target to flash). To change the message format, use the pull-down menu to
select either OPERATOR, ALL MSGS - TEXT, ALL MSGS - CODE, and ALL
MSGS - ALT. In the ALL MSGS formats, all messages are displayed, including
minor problems, which may have led up to an actual failure. In the ALL
MSGS-TEXT format, AP error codes are translated into text (as is done for operator
messages). In the ALL MSGS-ALT format the fixed error code is translated into
text indicating the operation being performed by the package that generated the
message. In the ALL MSGS-CODE format, all codes are given numerically.
If you need to contact Technical Service for help, it is important to provide them
with as much information as possible concerning the observed problem and actions
attempted. The ALL MSGS - CODE, for example, identifies the AP code that can
be found in the Diagnostic Error Messages user manual to determine the cause and
effect of a problem as well as the action to be taken.
DEVICE/SUBDEV The current device/subdevice ID (in the upper left) indicates
for which node messages are displayed or highlighted. The subdevice ID also
indicates the subdevice for which data is shown on subsequently called up displays.
To view another Device/Subdevice, select the appropriate object and use the context
menu.
EMPHASIS MODE The emphasis mode determines whether messages from the
selected source are the only messages shown (SHOWING ONLY) or are
highlighted to distinguish them from others (HIGHLIGHTING). To change the
emphasis mode, use the pull-down menu to select either the SHOWING ONLY and
HIGHLIGHTING modes. The messages displayed or highlighted are further limited
by the emphasis source. The effect of the emphasis mode and source is described
below.
142
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
Diagnostic Message Display
EMPHASIS SOURCE The emphasis source determines whether the set of
messages for the current device/subdevice (SUBDEVICE), subsystem
(SUBSYSTEM), or archive file (ARCHIVE) are displayed or highlighted. To
change the emphasis source, use the pull-down menu to select either the
SUBDEVICE, SUBSYSTEM, and ARCHIVE source. The messages displayed or
highlighted are further specified by the archive disk described below.
DISK NAME The disk identified in this field is the previously recorded archive
disk from which messages are being viewed. To change the archive disk, use the
pull-down menu to select either the available disk from which you want to view
messages. If an archive other than WC00 (the configurator disk) is selected, current
messages from the selected subdevice are not shown to avoid confusion between
recent messages on this system and previously archived messages from this or
another system.
The EMPHASIS MODE and EMPHASIS SOURCE fields together select six
possible ways to view messages. The effects are summarized below:
MODE
SOURCE
EFFECT
SHOWING SUBONLY
DEVICE
Displays current (if the disk is WC00) and archived
messages from the selected device/subdevice. The
messages shown 'are the same as those shown in the
default MESSAGES mode.
SHOWING SUBONLY
SYSTEM
Displays archived messages from all subdevices of the
selected device, highlighting messages from the
selected subdevice.
SHOWING ARCHIVE
ONLY
Displays archived messages from any device. The
messages shown are the same as those shown in the
ARCHIVE mode.
HIGHSUBLIGHTING DEVICE
Displays archived messages from any device,
highlighting those from the selected device/subdevice.
HIGHSUBLIGHTING SYSTEM
Displays archived messages from any device, highlighting those from any subdevice of the selected device.
HIGHARCHIVE
LIGHTING
Displays current and archived messages from the
selected device/subdevice, highlighting archived
messages.
3BUR002418-600 A
143
Diagnostic Message Display
Section 6 Status Displays
Printing Diagnostic Messages
The print view icon along the tool bar prints a screen dump of the diagnostic
message display. To print selected messages, use the Print Diagnostic Messages
context menu selection on the Diagnostic Message Display. Use the standard print
setup function to select a printer. After selecting the print view icon, the print
display, Figure 64, is shown.
Figure 64. Printing Diagnostic Messages
Select Screen Dump to print a picture of the current view. Use the Operator or
Custom selection to print All Messages or a Range of messages where the range
numbers are row numbers. Custom mode is selectable when the message format is
not OPERATOR. With Custom, Code and Alt cannot both be selected.
The ability to Print to file is also included as a way to send messages to a text file or
other print format.
144
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 6 Status Displays
System Performance Display
System Performance Display
The System Performance Display, Figure 65, is called up from the Subsystem Status
Display. It provides information on the performance of a specified device/subdevice
(node) in terms of CPU loading, Configurable Control Functions (CCF) software
loading, and memory pool usage.
Current
Peak
Average
Figure 65. System Performance Display
The CPU load performance display runs at a low priority. If the number of
Samples Since count is not updating regularly, then the recommended loading
has been exceeded and the value on the display is incorrect because the CPU load
has spiked to 100%.
The display provides information on the performance of a specified
device/subdevice (node) in terms of CPU loading, CCF software loading and
memory pool usage. There are three performance monitors on this display, each
containing one or more bar graphs showing percent usage. In each graph, current
value is indicated by a solid bar, peak by a yellow line, and average (where used) by
a blue marker.
3BUR002418-600 A
145
System Performance Display
Section 6 Status Displays
The bar graphs are color coded. Red indicates a high level of resource utilization (90
to 100%), yellow a moderately high level of utilization (75 to 90%), and green a
moderate level of utilization (0 to 75%). White is used to indicate neutral facts.
Excessive CCF load (red region) may be caused by problem areas such as:
•
The BASERATE field on the CCF Templet causing high average usage.
•
The PROCESSING RATE or PROCESSING PHASE field on the Loop
Definition or Device Loops Templet causing large peaks and low current usage.
•
Continuous or device loops driven by digital inputs causing high current and
average usage.
•
Alarm frequency due to narrow deadbands (causes high peak usage).
Reset ALL
Resets the samples since time year and month. YYYYMM.0 for Reset CPU, Reset
CCF, and Reset (Memory utilization).
Reset CPU
The Reset CPU button resets DATA1 of a SYS Data Entry FCM to zero which
resets the CPU load samples since time year and month.
Reset CCF
The Reset CCF button resets DATA7 of a SYS Data Entry FCM to zero which
resets the CCF load samples since time year and month.
Reset Memory Utilization
The Reset button resets DATA1 of a MEM Data Entry FCM to zero which resets the
memory utilization samples since time year and month.
146
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
I/O Displays Overview
I/O displays contain information that allow you to identify detectable fault
conditions, monitor general status and performance, change process outputs directly
for testing, and control the status of redundancy. The I/O displays include:
•
S800.
•
S100.
•
PROFIBUS.
•
TRIO.
•
Direct I/O.
Entries identifying an operator action on the I/O displays are relayed to the
appropriate logging device. Color coding of data shown on the displays is like the
diagnostic displays. Hardware factors to consider are:
•
No more than 30 TRIO blocks can be attached to a Field Bus Controller.
•
A SC Controller I/O Module has either all TRIO or all Direct I/O.
•
A SC Controller can have two Field Buses at most. Each can be either nonredundant or redundant.
•
All SC Controllers backed up by one specific backup controller must have the
same type of I/O: either TRIO or Direct I/O.
•
An Advant Controller 460 can have a mixture of TRIO and local S100 I/O,
with a maximum of four non-redundant or two redundant Field Buses.
•
An Advant Controller 410 can have a mixture of TRIO and local S100 I/O,
with a maximum of two non-redundant or one redundant Field Bus(es).
3BUR002418-600 A
147
S800 I/O Displays
Section 7 I/O Displays
S800 I/O Displays
These S800 runtime displays relate to the Series 800 process interface as described
in the S800 I/O User’s Guides where you can find additional information about
S800 I/O.
S800 LAN Display
The S800 LAN display, Figure 66, shows the CI520/CI522 submodule status and
information about each S800 I/O Station configured under a particular LAN. Select
a display target to call up the S800 Station display.
Figure 66. S800 LAN (Overview) Display
The heading fields on the S800 LAN display are described below.
148
Devsub
The controller DCN address where the S800 I/O is located.
State
This field shows the status of the controller as ACTIVE, DOWN or
AVAIL.
Name
The controller subsystem part of the logical name created during
database configuration.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
Lan
S800 LAN Display
This field represents the number of the Local Area Network (LAN)
for all the stations shown. For the AC 460 this is LAN # 1 - 4 and
for the AC 410 this is LAN # 1 or 2.
Go back to the controller display to select a different LAN.
Templet
The logical device name created during database configuration is
given in this field.
Label
Descriptive label associated with templet.
RPT Faults
Indicates the reporting method for fault condition. FLASH NOTIFY,
SILENT NOTIFY or NO NOTIFY.
AF100 INTERFACE - X Status Area
The AF100 Interface status area(s) represent the CI520 AF 100 Interface or the
redundant CI522 AF 100 Interfaces and are described below. For the CI520, the box
contains the current state of the AF100 INTERFACE - 1. For the CI522, the left box
contains the current state of the AF100 INTERFACE - 1 (as defined in the LAN
templet), and the right box contains the current state of the AF100 INTERFACE - 2.
Mod/Sub
This field represents the slot number of the of the controller carrier
MODule, and the SUBmodule location of the CI520/CI522.
Bus Address This is the AF 100 field bus address assigned to the CI520/CI522.
State
This field shows the status of the submodule.
ACTIVE indicates the submodule is in use.
BACKUP indicates the backup submodule is OK and ready.
FAILED means the submodule has stopped.
MISSING means there is not a submodule installed in this
location.
Media
This shows the redundancy status of the AF 100 bus media.
NONE means that no bus is connected.
BOTH UP means that dual media is used and operational.
CABLE 1 UP or CABLE 2 UP shows if only one bus is
connected and operational.
3BUR002418-600 A
149
S800 LAN Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
AF100 INTERFACE - X Menu
Each AF100 Interface status area contains an AF 100 INTERFACE - X menu
button. When the AF100 INTERFACE - x button is selected, a menu is displayed
with the items shown in Figure 67 and as explained below.
Figure 67. AF 100 INTERFACE - X menus
State
User can change state to:
RESTART re-initializes the lan,
DEACTIVATE forces all data qualities to ‘bad’,
ACTIVATE sets data qualities based on the active status.
SWITCHOVER switches to a backup interface if present.
RPT Faults
User can select to change reporting method: Flash Notify, Silent
Notify or No Notify.
Get
Diagnostics
Select this to get the diagnostics dialog, Figure 68.
S800 Station Detail
In the main section of the display, a detail window shows specific information about
each I/O Station. The right scroll bar is used to view other stations on the LAN. The
display is arranged in a 10 by 8 grid for all stations (1 - 80). Stations not configured
are not shown. Station 80 being in the lower right corner can be seen by scrolling the
window to that area of the grid. For each I/O Station, information is displayed as
described below.
150
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
S800 LAN Display
Station Item
15
STN
A
Station
Number
This is the number of the S800 I/O
Station as specified during database
configuration (1 - 80). It is also a screen
target to the Station display.
Station Type
The station type is shown under the
station number. STN = I/O Station, CTL
= Controller (CI520/CI522) and UNK =
unknown.
Status Boxes
This shows a letter for station status.
B
tz3_l3_s15
HRY STN 15
Description
M = missing, F = failed, U = unknown, N
= not ready, R = ready, A = active and B
= backup.
Station Border Border color is based on the letter
shown in the status box. M, F and U =
red, N = orange, B and R = yellow and
A = green. Border will flash when
diagnostic messages are present.
Templet Name Displayed as a single line tool tip when
the cursor is over the station target. The
and Label
templet name is first and label is
second.
If the station is the CI520/CI522 type CTL, selecting that station icon will bring up
the CI520/CI522 Diagnostics Display, Figure 68.
Figure 68. CI520/CI522 Diagnostics Display
3BUR002418-600 A
151
S800 Station Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
S800 Station Display
The S800 Station display is started by selecting a configured I/O station from the
S800 LAN Display. The S800 Station display, Figure 69, shows information about
the FCI Module, each S800 I/O Module and the I/O Clusters that are configured for
the I/O Station.
S800 I/O
Display
Target
Figure 69. S800 Station Display
Select an I/O Device display target to get a S800 Device Display. Use the context
menu to move up to the LAN display. Select the CI810 (FCI) box to get the CI810
Diagnostics Display (similar to Figure 68).
152
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
S800 Station Display
The top of the S800 Station display identifies the I/O Station, its Advant Controller
and has other information as described below.
Devsub
The controller DCN address where the S800 I/O is located.
State
This field shows the status of the controller as ACTIVE, DOWN or
AVAIL.
Name
The controller subsystem part of the logical name created during
database configuration.
Lan
This field represents the number of the Local Area Network (LAN)
for all the stations shown. For the AC 460 this is LAN # 1 - 4 and
for the AC 410 this is LAN # 1 or 2.
Go back to the controller display to select a different LAN.
Station
This field represents the number of the station.
Go back to the LAN display to select a different station.
Templet
The logical device name created during database configuration is
given in this field.
Label
Descriptive label associated with templet.
RPT Faults
Indicates the reporting method for fault condition. FLASH NOTIFY,
SILENT NOTIFY or NO NOTIFY.
Media
This shows the status of the AF 100 bus media.
NONE means that no bus is connected.
BOTH means that dual media is used and that both are
operational.
CABLE 1 UP or CABLE 2 UP shows if only one bus is
connected and operational.
3BUR002418-600 A
153
S800 Station Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
FCI - X Status Area
FCI Status areas represent a CI810A FCI or the redundant CI820 FCIs. For the
CI810A, the status box contains the current state of FCI - 1. For the redundant
CI820 FCIs, the left status box contains the current state of FCI - 1 (or the left FCI),
the right status box contains the current state of FCI - 2 (or the right FCI).
State
This field shows the status of the FCI (CI810A/CI820).
ACTIVE indicates the FCI is in use.
BACKUP indicates the station is running redundantly and the
backup is available.
READY indicates a transient state on the way to becoming
ACTIVE or BACKUP.
FAILED means the FCI has stopped.
MISSING means there is not an FCI connected.
UNKNOWN is an indeterminate state, sometimes seen as a
transient state as the station changes state.
FCI - X Menu
Each FCI - x status area contains a FCI button. Select the FCI button to display the
menu items described below.
State
User can change state to:
RESTART re-initializes the lan,
DEACTIVATE forces all data qualities to ‘bad’,
ACTIVATE sets data qualities based on the active status.
SWITCHOVER switches to a backup interface if present.
Switchover is not used for non-redundant FCIs.
154
RPT Faults
User can select to change reporting method to: Flash Notify, Silent
Notify or No Notify.
Get
Diagnostics
Select this to get the diagnostics dialog.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
S800 Station Display
S800 Device and FCI Detail
In the main part of the display, Figure 69, a detail window shows specific
information about the FCI, I/O Clusters and each I/O module device. The right
scroll bar is used to view other devices of the station. For the FCI and each I/O
module, information is displayed as described below (see Figure 69 for device
graphic, FCI shown below).
Station Item
0
CI810
A
Module
Number or
Position
This is the position of the FCI module (0)
or the I/O module (1 - 12) position. It is
also a screen target to the I/O Device
Display. I/O modules not configured are
not shown and blank space is left.
Module Type
The component type is shown under the
position number.
FCI = CI810A (CI820) module, DI810,
DO810, AI810 and etc. for I/O devices.
B
Status Boxes
tz3_l3_s15d3
HRY DEV 3
Description
This shows a letter for the module
status: M = missing, F = failed, U =
unknown, N = not ready, R = ready, A =
active, B = backup (for redundant FCIs)
and O = OSP state for output module
types (device only).
Device Border Border color is based on the letter
shown in the status box. M, F and U =
red, N = orange, B and R = yellow, A =
green and O = blue. Border will flash
when diagnostic messages are present.
Templet Name Displayed as a single line tool tip when
and Label
the cursor is over the station target. The
templet name is first and label is
second.
3BUR002418-600 A
155
S800 Device Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
S800 Device Display
The S800 Device display is started by selecting a configured I/O device from the
S800 Station Display. The S800 Device display, Figure 70, shows information for
the device and each channel configured for the S800 I/O module (device diagnostics
are not displayed). Use the context menu to move up to the station and LAN
displays. From this display you can:
•
Change channel output value.
•
Select loop CCF tag and start loop faceplate.
•
Select TLL point tag and start TLL faceplate.
•
Select device configuration display.
Figure 70. S800 Device Status Display
156
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
S800 Device Display
At the top of the display there is a section related to the addressing of the I/O
module.
Module Address Info
Description
Devsub
This field is the controller DCN address where the S800
I/O is located.
Name
This field shows the name of the AC460 Controller
Subsystem.
State
This field shows the status of the controller as ACTIVE,
DOWN and AVAIL.
Lan
This field represents the number of the Local Area
Network (LAN) of this station.
Station
This field represents the number of the I/O Station.
Cluster
This field represents the cluster number of the I/O
Station. Cluster 0 (zero) is the I/O modules connected
directly to the FCI. Clusters 1 - 7 are for remote optical
ModuleBus connections to the FCI.
Device
This field represents the device number of the I/O
module of the cluster selected on this station.
Command Menu
Set a device condition by pointing to the COMMAND
drop down menu and selecting the desired action:
RESTART re-initializes the device,
DEACTIVATE forces all data qualities to ‘bad’ (used
if applications need to be informed while the device
is not ready to be used, for example, if maintenance
is being performed),
ACTIVATE sets data qualities based on the active
status of each channel.
Config
3BUR002418-600 A
Brings up the I/O Module Configuration Display
(AI810/AI890, AO810/AO890, DI810, DI820, DO810,
DO820), which gives the configuration for that module
and allows configuration changes. See S800 I/O
Runtime Templets on page 283.
157
S800 Device Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
The next section gives information about the I/O module selected.
Templet
The device name created during database configuration is given in
this field.
Label
This field shows the label given this I/O module.
Revision
Gives the revision level of the module if available.
Config Type
This field shows the I/O module type that was configured for this
device number.
Actual Type
This field shows the actual I/O module type that is inserted in this
device number location.
Dev State
This field shows the status of the I/O module. ACTIVE indicates
the I/O module is OK. FAILED means the I/O module has stopped.
MISSING means there is not an I/O module installed.
The channel window section shows specific information about each channel of the
module. A scroll bar is used to view other channels of the device. For each channel,
several columns of information are displayed as described below.
Channel
The input (IN) or output (OUT) and channel number of the device.
The text color for each channel is based upon the reporting of
faults and the data quality:
Dark Green = Report faults is yes and data quality is good.
Red = Report faults is yes and data quality is bad
Light Green = Report faults is no, data quality is forced to
‘good’
CCF Tag
and
TLL Tag
158
The TAG is the name of the CCF loop or the TLL device that uses
the channel. If no loop or device is assigned to the channel then
the field is blank.
Select the CCF or TLL Tag target area to get the appropriate MOD
Faceplate. If a tag is configured for warmstart and is warm started,
it is shown with a white background.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
Value
S800 Warmstart
The actual value of the input from the process or the output value
sent to the process.
For an output field, you can change the value of an output channel
by selecting it and entering a value. The loop needs to be warmstarted from the FCM display.
Diagnostics
Not used.
See the S800 I/O instruction for error message information.
S800 Warmstart
Actions Upon Startup
Upon startup, outputs to all devices are disabled. The database is downloaded with
each CCF loop output FCM in its initial output mode and each device loop holding
its initial command. A period of time is allowed for each S800 module to log into
the system. As each module is recognized, its outputs are read. If configured for
warmstart, the corresponding CCF loop output FCM for each output channel on the
module is placed in the MANUAL mode and its result is synchronized with the field
output value in the module memory. The action taken by a device loop configured
for warmstart depends on whether there are inputs to the device. If there are inputs
to the device, the DEV_CMND parameter is adjusted to command the device to
assume the existing field state. If there are no inputs, the DEV_CMND parameter is
set to the INIT_CMND (NO COMMAND). Finally, the automatic transfer of
outputs to the S800 module is enabled.
Actions On Module Communication
As a module logs out, a diagnostic message Block nnnn has logged out is sent and
the associated data quality goes BAD. As a result, FCMs may take their configured
“action on output error” and the automatic transfer of outputs to the module is
disabled. As a module logs in, output values are read from the module. If configured
for warmstart, the corresponding CCF output FCM or device loop for each channel
on the module is warm started. That is, the output FCM is placed in the MANUAL
mode, and the output value from the module is written to its result attribute. For the
warm started device loop, its DEV_CMND attribute is set to NO COMMAND.
Finally, the automatic transfer of outputs to the S800 module is enabled.
3BUR002418-600 A
159
S800 Warmstart
Section 7 I/O Displays
Actions On Loop Download
When a loop with an output FCM configured for warmstart is downloaded, the
output mode of the FCM is placed in the MANUAL mode and the output value from
the module is written to its result attribute. When a device loop configured for
warmstart is downloaded, its DEV_CMND attribute is set to NO COMMAND.
Runtime Display Support
During runtime, but not at startup, as modules log in, diagnostic messages are sent
to the diagnostic archive. On the S800 I/O Display, there is a cross reference for a
CCF tag associated with each channel. On this display, the tags for CCF loops with
output FCMs and device loops configured for warmstart that were warm started are
shown with a white background. Note that the loop warm started for a given channel
is the loop whose tag is shown in the S800 I/O Display. If two or more loops
reference the same channel, only the last loop downloaded participates in warmstart
and is listed on the S800 I/O Display.
Operation Actions
With warmstart configured for output FCMs and device loops, the authorized user
should:
160
•
Acknowledge device acquisition diagnostics (at node startup, it is assumed all
modules present are warm started).
•
Call up the corresponding S800 I/O Display to determine which tags are
affected by warmstart.
•
Make any necessary modifications to synchronize the control system with the
current outputs.
•
Commission affected CCF output FCMs by setting their modes to AUTO.
•
Commission affected CCF device loops by issuing device commands (if
desired).
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
S100 I/O Displays
For continuous loops with Analog and Digital Output FCMs or device loops
configured for warmstart that have been warm started, the tag is shown with a
white background.
When CCF loops with output FCMs configured for warmstart are placed in the
MANUAL mode by either a warmstart or user action, their tags are shown with a
white background. When device loops configured for warmstart have their
DEV_CMND parameter set to NO COMMAND by either a warmstart action or
TCL command, their tags are also shown with a white background. Note that the
loop warm started for a given channel is the loop whose tag is shown in the S800
I/O Display. If two or more loops reference the same channel, only the last loop
downloaded participates in warmstart and is listed on the S800 I/O Display.
S100 I/O Displays
These S100 runtime displays relate to the Series 100 process interface as described
in the S100 I/O User’s Guide where you can find additional information about S100
I/O.
S100 LAN Display
The S100 LAN display, Figure 71, shows the submodule status and information
about each S100 device configured under a particular LAN. Display links for each
device are located in the first five columns of the row for the device. If a redundant
device is configured, the display link for the redundant device is activated in the last
two columns for the device row. Select the device display link to call up the S100
I/O Device Status display for that device.
3BUR002418-600 A
161
S100 LAN Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
Figure 71. S100 LAN Display
The heading fields on the S100 LAN display are described below.
Devsub
The controller DCN address where the S100 I/O is located.
State
The runtime status of the controller. ACTIVE indicates the
submodule is in use. FAILED means the submodule has stopped.
Name
The controller part of the logical controller name created during
database configuration is given in this field.
Lan
This field represents the number (1 to 4) of the local area network
for all the primary I/O boards listed below.
Mod/
For the AC 460 controller, this field represents the position of the
SC510 in the Futurebus+ backplane (3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12).
For the AC 410 controller, it represents the position of PM150 in
the 410 controller. This is always = 1.
Sub
For the AC 460 controller this field corresponds to where the S100
interface is attached to the I/O submodule (CI540) on the front of
the SC510 card (1 = top, 2 = bottom).
For the AC 410 controller it corresponding to the 5th interface
(S100 integrated backplane) on the 410 controller.
162
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
S100 Device Status Display
The column headings for each device row on the S100 I/O overview display are
described below.
Device
This field is the logical block number of the S100 device as
specified during database configuration.
Templet
The logical device name created during database configuration is
given in this field.
Dev Type
This field shows the specific I/O board type.
Comm Addr
This field is the hexadecimal communication address assigned
during database configuration.
Dev State
This field shows the runtime status of the I/O board. ACTIVE
indicates the primary I/O board is in use, processing I/O signals.
FAILED means the primary I/O board has stopped handling I/O
signals and the redundant I/O board may be ACTIVE if configured.
UNKNOWN indicates not installed.
Red Dev
If the I/O board has a redundant partner configured, the address
of the redundant board is given. The format (LL DD) indicates the
lan and device of the redundant I/O board. Click on the redundant
device to get the S100 I/O Device Status display. If a redundant
board is not configured, ‘00 00’ is displayed.
Red State
The status of the redundant I/O board. ‘Ready’ means the
redundant I/O board is available to backup the primary I/O board.
ACTIVE indicates the redundant I/O board is in use, backing up
the primary I/O board. If a redundant I/O board is not configured,
this field will show NOT CONFIG. The DSAX 110 can show that
both the primary and backup boards are ACTIVE since both
boards drive the outputs at 50% of required value.
S100 Device Status Display
The S100 Device Status Display, Figure 72, shows information for the device and
each channel configured for the S100 I/O board (device diagnostics are not
displayed). Use the context menu to move up to the LAN display.
3BUR002418-600 A
163
S100 Device Status Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
Figure 72. S100 I/O Device Status Display
The following is a description of the fields on the S100 I/O Device display. See the
S100 overview heading descriptions for Devsub, State, Name and Lan. See the S100
overview column heading descriptions for Device, Templet, Dev Type, Comm Addr,
and Dev State.
Channel
The input (IN) or output (OUT) and channel number of the device.
If the value is green, the Data Quality is good.
If the value is red, the Data Quality is bad.
CCF Tag
and
TLL Tag
The TAG is the name of the CCF loop or the TLL device that uses
the channel. If no loop or device is assigned to the channel then
the field is blank.
Select the CCF or TLL Tag target area to get the appropriate MOD
Faceplate.
If a tag is configured for warmstart and is warm started, it is shown
with a white background.
164
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
Value
Smoothstart Start-up Sequence
The actual value of the input from the process or the output value
sent to the process.
For an output field, you can change the value of an output channel
by selecting it and entering a value.
Diagnostics
Not used.
See the S100 I/O instruction for error message information.
Smoothstart Start-up Sequence
Upon acquisition of an S100 I/O device, a diagnostic message identifying the device
will be issued to the user. Use the MOD Faceplate or Loop FCM Display to see the
following conditions:
•
For an analog I/O device, whether the CCF tag which references a channel has
an Output FCM in the Manual mode.
•
For a digital I/O device, whether the CCF device loop which references a
channel has NO COMMAND as its DEV_CMND attribute.
Upon acquisition the user must:
1.
Acknowledge a device acquisition diagnostic message.
2.
Call up the corresponding MOD Faceplate or Loop FCM Display to find out
what loops are affected.
3.
Make any necessary modifications to synchronize the control system with the
current outputs.
4.
Commission any affected CCF output FCMs by setting their output modes to
AUTO.
5.
Commission any affected CCF Device loops by issuing device commands as
required.
S100 Warmstart
Actions Upon Node Startup
Upon node startup, outputs to all devices are disabled. The database is downloaded
with each CCF loop output FCM in its initial output mode and each device loop
3BUR002418-600 A
165
S100 Warmstart
Section 7 I/O Displays
holding its initial command. A period of time is allowed for each S100 board to log
into the system. As each board is recognized, its outputs are read. If configured for
warmstart, the corresponding CCF loop output FCM for each output channel on the
board is placed in the MANUAL mode and its result is synchronized with the field
output value in the board memory. The action taken by a device loop configured for
warmstart depends on whether there are inputs to the device. If there are inputs to
the device, the DEV_CMND parameter is adjusted to command the device to
assume the existing field state. If there are no inputs, the DEV_CMND parameter is
set to the INIT_CMND (NO COMMAND). Finally, the automatic transfer of
outputs to the S100 board is enabled.
Actions On Board Communication
As a board logs out, a diagnostic message Block nnnn has logged out is sent and
the associated data quality goes BAD. As a result, FCMs may take their configured
action on output error and the automatic transfer of outputs to the board is
disabled. As a board logs in, output values are read from the board. If configured for
warmstart, the corresponding CCF output FCM or device loop for each channel on
the board is warm started. That is, the output FCM is placed in the MANUAL mode,
and the output value from the board is written to its result attribute. For the warm
started device loop, its DEV_CMND attribute is set to NO COMMAND. Finally,
the automatic transfer of outputs to the S100 board is enabled.
Actions On Loop Download
When a loop with an output FCM configured for warmstart is downloaded, the
output mode of the FCM is placed in the MANUAL mode and the output value from
the board is written to its result attribute. When a device loop configured for
warmstart is downloaded, its DEV_CMND attribute is set to NO COMMAND.
Runtime Display Support
During runtime, but not at startup, as boards log in, diagnostic messages are sent to
the diagnostic archive. On the S100 I/O Display, there is a display target for a CCF
tag associated with each channel. On this display, the tags for CCF loops with
output FCMs and device loops configured for warmstart that were warm started are
shown with a white background. Note that the loop warm started for a given channel
is the loop whose tag is shown in the S100 I/O Display. If two or more loops
166
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
PROFIBUS Displays
reference the same channel, only the last loop downloaded participates in warmstart
and is listed on the S100 I/O Display.
Operation Action
With warmstart configured for output FCMs and device loops, the authorized user
should:
•
Acknowledge device acquisition diagnostics (at node startup, it is assumed all
boards present are warm started).
•
Call up the corresponding S100 I/O Display to determine which tags are
affected by warmstart.
•
Make any necessary modifications to synchronize the control system with the
current outputs.
•
Commission affected CCF output FCMs by setting their modes to AUTO.
•
Commission affected CCF device loops by issuing device commands (if
desired).
For continuous loops with Analog and Digital Output FCMs or device loops
configured for warmstart that have been warm started, the tag is shown with a
white background.
When CCF loops with output FCMs configured for warmstart are placed in the
MANUAL mode by either a warmstart or user action, their tags are shown with a
white background. When device loops configured for warmstart have their
DEV_CMND parameter set to NO COMMAND by either a warmstart action or
TCL command, their tags are also shown with a white background. Note that the
loop warm started for a given channel is the loop whose tag is shown in the S100
I/O Display. If two or more loops reference the same channel, only the last loop
downloaded participates in warmstart and is listed on the S100 I/O Display.
PROFIBUS Displays
These PROFIBUS runtime displays relate to a PROFIBUS process interface.
3BUR002418-600 A
167
PROFIBUS LAN Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
PROFIBUS LAN Display
The PROFIBUS LAN display, Figure 73, shows the CI541 submodule status (CTL)
and information about each device (DEV) configured under a particular LAN. From
this display you can:
•
Select a device display target (DEV) to call up the PROFIBUS Device display.
•
Scroll display as necessary to view all devices (up to 126).
•
View the CI541 (CTL) status and its Diagnostic Display.
•
Switch the display to another LAN # by returning to the AC460 display.
Figure 73. PROFIBUS LAN (Overview) Display
PROFIBUS LAN Header Area
The heading fields on the PROFIBUS LAN display are described below.
168
Devsub
The controller DCN address where the PROFIBUS I/O is located.
State
This field shows the status of the controller as ACTIVE or DOWN.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
PROFIBUS LAN Display
Name
The controller subsystem part of the logical name created during
database configuration.
Lan
This field represents the number of the Local Area Network (LAN)
for all the stations shown. For the AC 460 this is LAN # 1 - 4.
Go back to the controller display to select a different LAN.
Templet
The logical device name created during database configuration is
given in this field.
Label
Descriptive label associated with templet.
PROFIBUS LAN Status Area
The PROFIBUS LAN status area represents the CI541 Interface as described below.
Mod/Sub
This field represents the slot number of the of the controller carrier
MODule, and the SUBmodule location of the CI541.
Bus Address This is the field bus address assigned to the CI541.
State
This field shows the status of the CI541 submodule.
ACTIVE indicates the submodule is in use.
FAILED means the submodule has stopped.
MISSING means there is not a submodule installed in this
location.
Speed
3BUR002418-600 A
This shows the PROFIBUS network Bus Speed (Kbit/sec) as
entered on the PRFI_LAN templet.
169
PROFIBUS LAN Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
PROFIBUS LAN Device Detail
In the main section of the display, a detail window shows specific information about
each PROFIBUS Device. The right scroll bar is used to view other devices on the
LAN. The display is arranged in a 10 by 8 grid for all devices (0 -125). Devices not
configured are not shown. Device 125, being in the lower right corner, can be seen
by scrolling the window to that area of the grid. For each device, information is
displayed as described below.
Station Item
1
DEV
A
“PFB STW 15”, “AC9_1_L4”
Description
Device
Number
This is the number of the PROFIBUS
Device as specified during database
configuration (0 - 125). It is also a
screen target to the device display.
Type
The type can be:
DEV = PROFIBUS Device and
CTL = Controller (CI541).
Status Box
This shows a letter for the status.
M = missing, F = failed, U = unknown,
R = ready and A = active.
Station Border Border color is based on the letter
shown in the status box.
M, F and U = red,
R = yellow and A = green.
Border will flash when diagnostic
messages are present.
Templet Name Displayed as a single line tool tip when
and Label
the cursor is over the device target. The
templet name is first and label is
second.
170
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
PROFIBUS Device Display
If the device is the CI541 type CTL, selecting that icon will bring up the CI541
Diagnostics Display, Figure 74. Currently, there are no LAN diagnostics. Only the
revision will be displayed.
Figure 74. CI541 Diagnostics Display
PROFIBUS Device Display
The PROFIBUS Device display is started by selecting a configured device from the
PROFIBUS LAN Display. The PROFIBUS Device display, Figure 75, shows
information about the modules for the selected device on the current LAN. Select a
display target to get a Module/Channel Display. The right scroll bar is used to view
other modules. Use the context menu to move up to the LAN display. From this
display you can:
•
Select a module display target (MOD) to call up the Module/Channel display.
•
Scroll display as necessary to view all modules (up to 64).
•
View the device diagnostics and device info.
•
Call up the display to another LAN # by returning to the AC460 display or
navigate back to the LAN display through the context menu.
3BUR002418-600 A
171
PROFIBUS Device Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
Figure 75. PROFIBUS Device Display
PROFIBUS Device Header Area
The top of the PROFIBUS Device display identifies the device, the associated
AC460 controller and has other information as described below.
172
Devsub
The controller DCN address where the device is located.
State
This field shows the status of the controller as ACTIVE or DOWN.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
PROFIBUS Device Display
Name
The controller subsystem part of the logical name created during
database configuration.
Lan
This field represents the number of the Local Area Network (LAN)
for all the stations shown. For the AC 460 this is LAN # 1 - 4.
Go back to the controller display to select a different LAN.
Device
This field represents the device number.
Go back to the LAN display to select a different device.
Templet
The logical device name created during database configuration is
given in this field.
Label
Descriptive label associated with templet.
PROFIBUS Device Status Area
The PROFIBUS Device area shows the device state and contains a button to display
device diagnostics and information. Select the PROFIBUS Device box to select the
Get Diagnostics or Get Device Info display, Figure 76.
State
This field shows the status of the device.
ACTIVE indicates the device is in use.
READY indicates a transient state on the way to becoming
ACTIVE.
FAILED means the device has stopped.
MISSING means there is not an device connected.
UNKNOWN is an indeterminate state, sometimes seen as a
transient state as the station changes state.
Get
Diagnostics
Select this to get vendor specific device-related diagnostic codes,
Figure 76. You may also get vendor specific device diagnostics by
selecting the device detail. See the vendor’s documentation to
interpret device-related diagnostic hexadecimal codes.
Get Device
Info
3BUR002418-600 A
Select this to get device information, Figure 76.
173
PROFIBUS Device Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
Figure 76. PROFIBUS Device Get Diagnostics and Get Device Info displays
Device Detail
In the main part of the display, Figure 75, a detail window shows specific
information about the devices and each associated I/O module. The right scroll bar
is used to view other modules. The information is displayed as described below (see
Figure 75for device graphic).
174
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
PROFIBUS Device Display
Station Item
0
MOD
Module
Number or
Position
This is the position of the I/O module. It
is also a screen target to the Module
Display. I/O modules not configured are
not shown and a blank space is left.
Component
Type
The component type is shown under the
position number.
DEV = PROFIBUS Device
MOD = I/O Module.
A
Status Box
“PFB DEV 3”, “AC9_1_L4”
Description
This shows a letter for the module
status:
M = missing, F = failed, U = unknown,
R = ready, and A = active.
Device Border Border color is based on the letter
shown in the status box.
M, F and U = red, R = yellow,
A = green. Border will flash when
diagnostic messages are present.
Templet Name Displayed as a single line tool tip when
the cursor is over the station target. The
and Label
templet name is first and label is
second.
3BUR002418-600 A
175
Module/Channel Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
Module/Channel Display
The PROFIBUS Module/Channel display is started by selecting a configured
module from the Device Display. The Module/Channel display, Figure 77, shows
information for a single module, including channel type and value, CCF or TLL tag
association, channel value, data quality and diagnostics. A module may have a
mixture of data and I/O types. Use the context menu to move up to the device or
LAN displays. From this display you can:
•
Change channel output value
•
Select loop CCF tag and start loop faceplate
•
Select TLL point tag and start TLL faceplate
•
View the module/channel diagnostics.
•
Switch the display to another LAN # by returning to the AC460 display.
•
Navigate to current LAN or Device through the context menu.
Figure 77. Module/Channel Display
176
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
Module/Channel Display
PROFIBUS Module/Channel Header Area
At the top of the display there is a section related to the addressing of the I/O
module as described below.
Module Address Info
Description
Devsub
The controller DCN address where the device is located.
State
This field shows the status of the controller as ACTIVE
or DOWN.
Lan
This field represents the number of the Local Area
Network (LAN) for the AC 460 device shown (can be 1 to
4). Go back to the controller display to select a different
LAN.
Device
This field represents the device number.
Go back to the LAN display to select a different device.
Module
This field represents the module number.
Go back to the device display to select a different
module.
Templet
The logical device name created during database
configuration is given in this field.
Label
Descriptive label associated with templet.
State (Module)
This field shows the status of the module.
ACTIVE indicates the module is OK.
FAILED means the module has stopped.
MISSING means there is no module installed.
3BUR002418-600 A
177
Startup
Section 7 I/O Displays
PROFIBUS Module/Channel Status Area
The channel status window section shows specific information about each channel
of the module. A scroll bar is used to view other channels of the device. For each
channel, several columns of information are displayed as described below.
Channel
The input (IN) or output (OUT) and channel number of the device.
The text color for each channel is based upon the data quality:
Dark Green = data quality is good.
Red = data quality is bad
CCF Tag
and
TLL Tag
The TAG is the name of the CCF loop or the TLL device that uses
the channel. If no loop or device is assigned to the channel then
the field is blank.
Select the CCF or TLL Tag target area to get the appropriate MOD
Faceplate.
Select the context menu for CCF or TLL tag to navigate to the
Loop FCM or Loop Detail display.
Value
The actual value of the input from the process or the output value
sent to the process.
For an output field, you can change the value of an output channel
by selecting it and entering a value.
Diagnostics
Diagnostics from the PROFIBUS device. See the vendor manual
for detailed information.
Startup
All output values are set to zero (0) on PROFIBUS startup.
178
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
TRIO Displays
TRIO Displays
The TRIO runtime displays using MOD 300 are described here. For a complete
description of the aspects of TRIO which operators and engineers must understand
to perform their runtime functions, refer to the 800xA for TRIO/Genius,
(3BUR002460*). The types of Remote I/O Displays are:
•
TRIO (Remote I/O) LAN Display which shows the status of a Field Bus and its
attached blocks (up to 30).
•
TRIO (Remote I/O) Block Display which gives the status, I/O values and
diagnostic messages for one of the TRIO blocks.
Accessing the Remote I/O Displays for a SC Controller
To access the Remote I/O Displays for a SC Controller:
1.
Select the desired SC Controller Subsystem and access the Controller
Subsystem Status Display.
2.
To use the Display Request button, select the desired SC Controller, select the
Display Request button and then select the desired TRIO LAN to access the
TRIO LAN Display.
3.
Alternately, you can select a specific Remote I/O in the Diagnostic area to get
the associated TRIO LAN display.
Accessing the Remote I/O Displays for an AC Controller
To access the Remote I/O Displays for an AC Controller:
1.
Select the desired AC Controller Subsystem and access the AC460 or AC410
Subsystem Status Display.
2.
Select the desired TRIO LAN submodule to access the TRIO LAN Display.
3BUR002418-600 A
179
TRIO LAN Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
TRIO LAN Display
The TRIO LAN Display, Figure 78 for AC Controller and Figure 79 for SC
Controller, show the status of the TRIO Field Bus and its attached blocks.
From this display you can:
•
Activate, Deactivate, Restart or Switch Bus Redundancy (AC Controller)
•
Establish, Terminate, or Switch Bus (SC Controller)
•
Enable, Disable or Clear All Diagnostics
•
Activate all blocks
Figure 78. TRIO LAN Display (AC)
180
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
TRIO LAN Display
Figure 79. TRIO LAN Display (SC)
TRIO LAN Header Area
The heading fields on the TRIO LAN display are described below.
Devsub
The controller DCN address where the TRIO is located.
State
This field shows the status of the controller as ACTIVE or DOWN.
Name
The controller subsystem part of the logical name created during
database configuration.
Lan
This field represents the number of the Local Area Network (LAN)
for all the stations shown. For the AC 460, this is LAN # 1 - 4. For
the SC Controller, this is LAN # 1 - 2.
Go back to the controller subsystem status display to select a
different LAN.
3BUR002418-600 A
181
TRIO LAN Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
TRIO LAN Status Area
The TRIO LAN status area represents the Field Bus Interface as described below.
Redundancy
Possible values are:
AVAILABLE - Redundancy is configured and enabled. When
it is available, the system switches buses when
communications with an active block is lost. You are not
allowed to switch single blocks between the buses.
NOT AVAILABLE - Redundancy is configured, but not
enabled (for the AC 460, one of the CI560 TRIO MIB
submodules is either MISSING, FAILED, or READY).
NOT CONFIGURED - Redundancy is not configured on the
REMOTEIO templet.
Diag.
Checking
Enabled or Disabled. Use this field to enable or disable diagnostic
checking for all blocks on the Field Bus.
Bus A or
Use the context menu associated with the Bus A or Bus B status
and select the appropriate command to do the following:
Bus B
Select Diagnostics and from the submenu
select:
•Enable,
•Disable or
•Clear All (to clear all diagnostics for every
block on the bus)
Select Activate All to activate all inactive blocks on the bus (either
bus for the AC 460). This is equivalent to all blocks signing into
CCF. When a block is not active, CCF channels related to it are
given a BAD data quality. This does not change any configuration
parameters of the block. If a block was made inactive via its TRIO
Block Display, this command can be used to activate it.
Select Redundancy and from the submenu select:
182
•
Establish, Terminate, or Switch Bus (see Redundancy on
the SC Controller on page 183) or
•
Activate Bus, Deactivate Bus, Restart Bus or Switch Bus
(see Redundancy on the AC Controller on page 183).
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
TRIO LAN Display
Mod/Sub
This field represents the slot number of the of the controller carrier
Module, and the Submodule location of the CI560 TRIO MIB
submodule (AC). This field is N/A on the SC controller.
State
This field shows the status of the CI560 submodule (AC).
ACTIVE indicates the submodule is in use.
FAILED means the submodule has stopped or no redundant
bus is configured.
MISSING means there is not a submodule installed in this
location.
READY means the redundant bus is deactivated.
This field is N/A on the SC controller
MSEC
This field gives the scan time in milliseconds for the Field Bus as
computed by the Advant OCS.
HHM
IN USE, NOT IN USE. This field indicates if a Hand-held Monitor
(HHM) is being used on the bus.
Redundancy on the SC Controller
You will be asked to Confirm or Cancel redundancy requests.
Use Establish on a bus with redundancy configured and NOT AVAILABLE to
make it AVAILABLE.
Use Terminate on a bus that is AVAILABLE to make it NOT AVAILABLE.
Use Switch Bus to force a switchover to the other bus.
Redundancy on the AC Controller
You will be asked to Confirm or Cancel redundancy requests.
Use Deactivate Bus on a bus with redundancy AVAILABLE, bus state ACTIVE
and no blocks using it to change the bus state to READY and redundancy to NOT
AVAILABLE.
Use Activate Bus on a bus with redundancy NOT AVAILABLE and bus state
READY to change the bus state to ACTIVE and redundancy to AVAILABLE.
3BUR002418-600 A
183
TRIO LAN Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
Use Restart Bus if the CI560 TRIO MIB submodule does not come up as expected
after a controller reboot or to restart a failed Field Bus Controller.
Use Switch Bus to force a switchover of all blocks using the selected ACTIVE bus
with redundancy AVAILABLE to the other bus.
TRIO Blocks on the Field Bus
Each block on the Field Bus is represented by a row on the TRIO LAN Display. To
select a TRIO Block Display, move the cursor to the row for the block and click.
The block column has either the block number in red or the background in red to
indicate the block has an active diagnostic message. The following information is
displayed for each block:
Block
The first cell in a row contains the block number, 1 to 30, for the
block on the bus. This number is displayed as follows for the
indicated conditions:
Red = diagnostic(s) active
Black = no diagnostics active
On the AC Controller, if this cell has a black
background, you can use the context menu to
get the Switch Bus command (background is
red if diagnostic is active). Using Switch Bus
here switches only those blocks associated with the BSM (a single
stub) providing redundancy is AVAILABLE.You will be asked to
Confirm or Cancel the switch bus request.
Also on the AC Controller, the letter A or B after the number
indicates which bus the block is using. If the block is FAILED, then
a ? replaces the bus letter.
Templet
184
This cell contains either the name of the block templet or NOT
CONFIGURED if no block templet exists.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
TRIO Block Display
Block Type
The type is displayed here. The actual type may be the same as
the corresponding block templet or it may be different.
Block State
There are four possible block states:
ACTIVE (shown green)
INACTIVE (shown yellow)
FAILED (shown red). The block bus indicator shows a ?.
INIT FAIL - failure to initialize (shown red)
TRIO Block Display
The TRIO Block Display gives the status, I/O values and diagnostic messages for a
selected TRIO block. You access the TRIO Block Display by selecting a Block row
on the TRIO LAN Display. Figure 80 and Figure 81 show TRIO Block Displays
which represent the appearance and operation of the block displays. The differences
among the block displays are in the I/O portions.
From this display you can:
•
Return to the subsystem status display to access other TRIO LAN Displays or
use the context menu to select LAN Display.
•
Read or Clear Block Diagnostics
•
Activate or Deactivate Block Status
•
Open associated CCF or TLL faceplate for a channel (click on CCF Tag or
TLL Tag for desired channel)
The TRIO block display does not show the TLL tag if both CCF and TLL are
configured.
3BUR002418-600 A
185
TRIO Block Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
Figure 80. TRIO Block Display (Analog)
Figure 81. TRIO Block Display (Counter)
186
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
TRIO Block Display
TRIO Block Header Area
The heading fields on the TRIO Block display are described below.
Devsub
The controller DCN address where the TRIO is located.
State
This field shows the status of the controller as ACTIVE or DOWN.
Lan
This field represents the number of the Local Area Network (LAN)
for all the stations shown. For the AC 460, this is LAN # 1 - 4. For
the SC Controller, this is LAN # 1 - 2.
Go back to the controller display to select a different LAN.
Block
This field identifies the block by its number, 1 to 30. Return to the
TRIO LAN Display to select another block.
TRIO Block Status Area
The TRIO Block status area represents the block as described below.
Templet
This field contains the name assigned to the block templet for this
block.
Block Status
There are four possible block states:
ACTIVE
INACTIVE
FAILED
INIT FAIL - failure to initialize
Use the context menu on this field to
Activate (make block status ACTIVE) or
Deactivate (make block status
INACTIVE) the block.
Config Type
This field indicates the type of block templet configured for the
block.
Actual Type
This field contains the actual block type.
3BUR002418-600 A
187
TRIO Block Display
Section 7 I/O Displays
TRIO Block I/O Area
The TRIO Block I/O area represents the I/O data as described below.
Channel
Channel number. The type of channel is indicated as:
IN (Input)
OUT (Output)
TRI (Tri state Input)
BSM (Bus Switch Block controller output)
The colors used to display the data quality are:
CCF Tag
•
green: good data quality
•
red: bad data quality
•
yellow: diagnostic cleared, system is checking to see if
problem is corrected
•
flashing color: value forced with HHM, yellow for good data
quality, red for bad
Tag of the loop sending or receiving information from the channel.
If multiple tags access the same channel, only one tag is displayed
for it.
Note that for continuous loops with Analog and Digital Output
FCMs or device loops configured for warmstart that have been
warmstarted, the tag is shown with a white background.
TLL Tag
188
A TLL point may also interact with the channel. To view the TLL
point, select the TLL Tag cell for the point.
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
Value
Direct I/O Displays
Current value of the channel expressed as one of the following:
0 or 1 for digital
counts or engineering value for analog
degrees for thermocouples
degrees or ohms for RTDs
A or B for BSM (Bus Switch Module) status
Normally, writing an output causes the value to show red until the
value is actually updated. However, writing a forced I/O point in
manual may stay red because no value is ever written back. Use
refresh to update the display.
Diagnostics
This area displays fault messages that come from the blocks.
The DIAGNOSTICS header is red when a
block diagnostic with no associated
channel is present. Use the context menu
in this column to read (Block Diagnostics)
in a Diagnostics window or Clear Diagnostics. A single channel
diagnostic will appear directly in the related diagnostic cell. You
will get a diagnostic window for a channel when the message
“Click for multiple channel diagnostics” appears in a row.
When CCF loops with output FCMs configured for warmstart are placed in the
MANUAL mode by either a warmstart or operator action, their tags are shown
with a white background. When device loops configured for warmstart have their
DEV_CMND parameter set to NO COMMAND by either a warmstart action or
TCL command, their tags are also shown with a white background. Note that the
loop warmstarted for a given channel is the loop whose tag is shown in the TRIO
Block Display. If two or more loops reference the same channel, only the last
loop downloaded participates in warmstart and is listed on the TRIO Block
Display.
Direct I/O Displays
Controller I/O (Direct I/O for a Controller) applies only to a SC or Model B
Controller. The Controller I/O display shows all configured direct I/O for the
selected SC or Model B Controller.
3BUR002418-600 A
189
Direct I/O Displays
Section 7 I/O Displays
Access the Direct I/O Display, Figure 82, from the Controller Subsystem Status
display by selecting an active controller, then selecting the Display Request button
and selecting Controller I/O, Alternately, you can select a direct I/O device in the
Diagnostics window of the Controller Subsystem Status display.
Figure 82. Direct I/O Display
From this display you can:
•
Return to the subsystem status display using the controller context menu (right
click anywhere except in a valid CCF or TLL tag field)
•
Open associated CCF or TLL faceplate for a channel (click on CCF Tag or
TLL Tag for desired channel)
CCF can use any I/O type (Analog Input, Analog Output, Pulsed Input, Digital
Input, Digital Output and Device Loop).
190
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 7 I/O Displays
Direct I/O Block Header Area
TLL uses only the Digital I/O. Direct I/O for a controller can supply up to 40 regular
digital channels and eight interrupting contact input channels. The number of points
provided by direct I/O for a turbo node depends on the number of digital I/O boards
in the node.
Direct I/O Block Header Area
The heading fields on the Controller I/O display are described below.
Devsub
The controller DCN address where the direct I/O is located.
State
This field shows the status of the controller as ACTIVE or DOWN.
If the controller goes down, existing data is cleared.
Name
The controller subsystem part of the logical name created during
database configuration.
Direct I/O Area
The Direct I/O area represents the Analog I/O and Digital I/O data as described
below.
Channel
Channel number. The type of channel is indicated as:
IN (Input)
OUT (Output)
The colors used to display the data quality are:
CCF Tag
•
dark green: good data quality
•
red: bad data quality
Tag of the loop sending or receiving information from the channel.
If multiple tags access the same channel, only one tag is displayed
for it.
Select the CCF Tag target area to get the Loop FCM display (use
the context menu for other choices).
3BUR002418-600 A
191
Direct I/O Area
Section 7 I/O Displays
TLL Tag
A TLL point may also interact with the channel. If both a CCF tag
and a TLL tag are configured, only the CCF Tag will show and the
TLL tag will display a ?.
When a TLL tag is present (Digital I/O only), select the TLL Tag
target area or use the context menu to get the IO Point Faceplate.
Value
Current value of the channel expressed as one of the following:
0 or 1 for digital
A real number for analog inputs and outputs
If the channel type is input, the Value field is not editable.
If the channel type is output, the Value field is editable
(TRIOCONTROL is used for special access rights as described in
800xA for MOD 300 Configuration (3BUR002417*)).
Normally, writing an output causes the value to show red until the
value is actually updated. However, writing a forced I/O point in
manual may stay red because no value is ever written back. Use
refresh to update the display.
Unit
For Analog I/O Only. The value in the Unit field is always volts (V)
for analog input channels and milliamperes (MA) for analog output
channels.
Before changing an output value from this display, the loop must first be turned
off or the value will be overwritten when the loop is processed.
192
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Typical Operator Activities
All operator activities related to ongoing operations are performed using the
operation displays provided with 800xA for MOD 300. Tuning parameters can be
accessed from these displays. The ability to make tuning adjustment for alarm and
control parameters depends on the access rights of the user.
This section describes basic operator activities to illustrate use of the MOD CCF
displays in the 800xA System environment. These activities include:
•
Selecting and viewing a control loop.
•
Monitoring process variable input and setpoint.
•
Monitoring output to the control device.
•
Monitoring alarm status.
•
Acknowledging alarms.
•
Changing the local setpoint.
•
Changing operating mode between manual and automatic.
•
Changing output value while in manual mode.
•
Changing setpoint source between local setpoint and remote setpoint
(if enabled).
•
Changing ratio and bias values (if configured).
3BUR002418-600 A
193
Selecting and Viewing a Control Loop
Section 8 Operation Examples
Selecting and Viewing a Control Loop
Object Browser
Select an object from the Object Browser using the
Control Structure.
Click the object to access the primary display aspect.
For a CCF loop, this is the Faceplate.
Right click to get the context menu. This allows you to
select either the Loop Detail Display or the Loop FCM
Display. The same approach is also used for Diagnostic,
TCL and TLL displays.
Each object is identified by a user configured tag name.
Loop Detail Display
Use the Loop Detail Display to enable/disable and
change limit parameters, to change loop and tune
parameters and to access the associated Loop FCM and
Loop Faceplate.
Loop FCM Display
Use the Loop FCM Display to access the Loop Templet
and FCM Templet displays. The Loop FCM Display and
its associated templets may be restricted from normal
operator use.
194
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Loop Faceplate (Auto/Local Mode)
Selecting and Viewing a Control Loop
Tag description could indicate that this faceplate applies
to PID control loop. The data displayed applies only to
the loop which is identified by the tag name.
[Pv] indicates the current measured value.
[Sp] indicates the current setpoint value.
[Out] indicates the current output value.
The current output high limit and low limit values are
shown on the Out bar graph scale.
PID loop is operating in automatic with local setpoint
[LOC].
To adjust local setpoint from the faceplate, use the
setpoint slider or the [Sp] entry field.
Loop Faceplate (Manual/Local)
Tag name could indicate that this faceplate applies to a
PID control loop.
Current process temperature [Pv] is 31.72° C.
Current value of output in percent is being displayed
[Out] 67.99.
Loop is operating in manual with local setpoint [LOC],
and Feedback [FB].
To adjust output in manual, use output slider or the [Out]
entry field.
3BUR002418-600 A
195
Single Loop Operation in Automatic Mode
Section 8 Operation Examples
Single Loop Operation in Automatic Mode
Typical operations for a single control loop in the automatic mode can be with local
setpoint, remote setpoint, and remote setpoint with ratio and bias.
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Local Setpoint
When a control loop is configured for single loop operation with local setpoint, the
faceplate displays and control button operations resemble the example below.
indicates that the controller is in automatic
mode. Current output value cannot be
changed in automatic.
indicates local setpoint is active. Shaded
setpoint value field and slide bar on setpoint
graphic indicates that the local setpoint can
be changed in automatic. Use the slider or the entry
value box [Sp] to change the value with confirmation.
An engineering units label has been configured for
degrees Centigrade (DEGC).
Use the remote button to switch from local to
remote.
Use the manual button to switch from
automatic to manual. Output can be changed
in the manual.
196
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Remote Setpoint
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Remote Setpoint
When a control loop is configured for single loop operation with remote setpoint,
the faceplate displays and control operations resembles the example shown in
Figure 83.
Control loop is in automatic mode.
Remote setpoint is being used.
[Sp] indicates the current setpoint value. Remote setpoint
cannot be changed locally.
[Out] indicates the current output value. Output value
cannot be changed in automatic.
Use the local button to switch back to Local
from remote [REM]. Setpoint can be changed
when in local.
Use the manual button to switch from
automatic to manual. Output can be changed in
manual.
Figure 83. SC5_1-PID2: Faceplate
3BUR002418-600 A
197
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Ratio and Bias
Section 8 Operation Examples
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Ratio and Bias
A setpoint bumpless transfer is possible when the balance mode is enabled and the
system can manipulate the ratio and/or bias to prevent process bumps. These
configurations calculate a ratio or bias value that balances the remote setpoint with
the local setpoint upon a switch from local to remote setpoint.
Using auto bias, a switch from local to remote setpoint will cause the bias value to
automatically adjust to the difference between the active setpoint and the remote
setpoint times the ratio value. For example, if the active setpoint is 170.00 and the
remote setpoint is 200.00 with a ratio of 2.00, then the auto bias value will be:
-230.00 = 170-(200*2).
Using auto ratio, a switch from local to remote setpoint will cause the ratio value to
automatically adjust to the ratio between the active setpoint minus bias and the
remote setpoint. For example, if the active setpoint is 170.00 and the remote setpoint
is 200.00 with a bias of -230.00, then the auto ratio value will be:
2 = (170- (-230))/200.
The loop is in auto with a local setpoint and
with local bias.
Adjust the bias value in the Bi field to change the active
remote setpoint by the local bias value.
The new setpoint appears in the SP field.
Adjust the ratio value in the Ra field to change the active
remote setpoint by the local ratio value.
The new setpoint appears in the SP field.
Use the remote (REM) button to switch from
local to remote setpoint.
Bias value automatically adjusts to balance
remote and local setpoints.
198
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Feedforward
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Feedforward
Feedforward control is a strategy used to compensate for disturbances in a system
before they affect the controlled process variable. A feedforward control system
measures a disturbance variable, predicts its effect on the process, and applies
corrective action to cancel the effect of the disturbance. A block diagram of
feedforward control type of system is shown in Figure 84.
Figure 84. Block Diagram of feedforward control system
Feedforward control system provides a combination of feedforward and feedback
control. Feedback provides its normal function of holding the process at the
setpoint. Feedforward helps the feedback function by modifying the control output
as required to cancel the effect of variations in the disturbance variable. The
feedforward input (set up as a percent of output) is multiplied by a constant (gain),
and a bias value (%) is added to or subtracted from the signal. The gain and bias
values are tunable. The feedforward function can be configured to either add the
signal to the control output or multiply the output by the signal.
3BUR002418-600 A
199
Single Loop Automatic Operation with Feedforward
Section 8 Operation Examples
The faceplate display and control button operations for feedforward control
resembles the example shown in Figure 85.
indicates that the controller is in automatic with
feedforward input.
indicates local setpoint.
indicates that the loop is in the Feedback
mode. Use the [FF] or [FF/FB] buttons to switch
to the Feedforward or Feedforward-Feedback
modes.
Figure 85. Faceplate and Control Buttons for feedforward control
200
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Single Loop Auto/Manual Transfer
Single Loop Auto/Manual Transfer
Operations required in transferring a single control loop between the automatic and
manual control modes, and the influence of automatic or manual reset on these
operations is described in this manual.
Transfer from Manual to Automatic
The faceplate displays and control button operations for the transfer from manual to
automatic resembles the example shown in Figure 86.
Indicates that the controller is in manual. Use
Out field to adjust output in manual.
indicates local setpoint is active. The local
setpoint can be changed in automatic. Use the
setpoint slider or the value box [SP] to change
the value with confirmation.
Press Auto button to transfer from manual to
automatic control. When the controller is in
automatic, the output value field is no longer
highlighted and the output slider disappears.
Press Remote button to switch the setpoint
from local to remote. When the controller is in
remote, the setpoint value field is no longer
highlighted and the setpoint slider disappears.
Figure 86. Transfer from Manual to Automatic - Faceplate
3BUR002418-600 A
201
Transfer from Manual to Automatic
Section 8 Operation Examples
Switching from Manual to Auto can be made bumpless by using the following
techniques:
Transfers In A Loop With Ratio Or Bias Balancing
The Balance Mode field on the FCM templet is used to specify either ratio or bias
automatic adjustment by the system so the Auto Output Value of the controller is
equal to the Manual Output Value.
Transfers In A Loop With Output Tracking
The output of a PID FCM supplying the input for the Auto/Manual Controller FCM
can be configured to track the TRAK-VAR parameter of the Auto/Manual
Controller FCM.
Transfers In A Loop With Automatic Reset Balancing
When the control algorithm has reset (integral) response, transfers from automatic
to manual and from manual to automatic are always bumpless. After switching from
manual to automatic, the process variable is under automatic control in response to
the active setpoint, either local or remote.
If the control loop is configured for local setpoint tracking, the local setpoint tracks
the process value when the loop is in manual. The process is always at the local
setpoint when a transfer to automatic is made, regardless of setpoint limits
If the control loop does not have local setpoint tracking, the local setpoint and the
process variable may not be at the same value at the time of a transfer from manual
to automatic. The transfer is still bumpless, but immediately after the transfer the
process ramps toward the local setpoint value at the reset rate.
Transfers In A Loop With Manual Reset
If the control loop does not have automatic reset (integral) response, any
setpoint/process offset at the time of a transfer from manual to automatic is
maintained. If the loop is configured to provide procedureless manual reset, the
manual reset value required to eliminate the offset is automatically calculated while
the loop is in manual, and this calculated value is used to remove the offset
following a transfer to automatic.
202
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Transfer from Automatic to Manual
If the loop does not have procedureless manual reset, a setpoint or a process offset
after transfer to automatic can be eliminated by adjusting the manual reset value.
Transfer from Automatic to Manual
The faceplate displays and control button operations for the transfer from automatic
to manual resembles the example shown in Figure 87. During operation, switching
from Auto to Manual mode requires one step and is bumpless because the Manual
output value automatically tracks the Auto output value when the FCM is in Auto.
The output value can then be manipulated in the manual.
Indicates controller in automatic.
Indicates local setpoint is active.
Press Manual button to transfer from manual to
automatic control. When the controller is in
manual, the current output value can be
adjusted.
Press Remote button to switch the setpoint
from local to remote. When the controller is in
remote, the setpoint value field is no longer
highlighted and the setpoint slider disappears.
If this indicator is present, the local setpoint is
tracking the process value while the loop is in
manual so that the setpoint and process are
equal when the loop is transferred back to
automatic.
Figure 87. Transfer from Automatic to Manual - Faceplate
3BUR002418-600 A
203
Single Loop Operation in Manual Mode
Section 8 Operation Examples
Single Loop Operation in Manual Mode
This section describes operations when a control loop is in manual. The faceplate
displays and control button operations resemble the examples shown in Figure 88.
indicates that the controller is in manual.
Current output value display [OP] is in percent
and can be adjusted using:
•
the output slider
•
the [OP] entry menu
indicates local setpoint is active and can be
changed. Use the slider or the value box [SP]
to change the value with confirmation. Since
the controller is in manual, the process is
following the manual controller output and not the
controller algorithm.
Figure 88. Single Loop Operation in Manual Mode - Faceplate
204
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Cascade Operation
Cascade Operation
A cascade control system is a multiple-loop system where the primary variable (in
the master controller) is controlled by adjusting the setpoint of a related secondary
variable (in the slave controller). The secondary variable then effects the primary
variable through the process. A block diagram of this type of cascade system is
shown below.
The main objective in cascade control is to divide an otherwise difficult to control
process into two portions, whereby a secondary control loop is formed around a
major disturbance, thus leaving only minor disturbances to be controlled by the
primary controller.
Figure 89. Block Diagram of a Cascade system
Cascade Operation in Manual
While in manual, the slave setpoint tracks (automatically remains equal to) the slave
process variable. This characteristic is optional by enabling setpoint tracking on the
slave. It will eliminate the need for the controller to respond immediately to any
deviation which exists when the mode is changed from manual to automatic.
Without setpoint tracking on the slave, the controller responds to the deviation
which exists by ramping the output at the reset rate established when the loop was
tuned.
3BUR002418-600 A
205
Cascade Operation in Auto
Master Controller
Section 8 Operation Examples
Slave setpoint
tracks slave
process variable.
Slave Controller
Master output
tracks slave
setpoint.
Slave output can
be adjusted
manually.
Master setpoint
tracks master
process variable.
Figure 90. Manual Cascade operation
Meanwhile, the output of the master controller tracks a signal from the slave
controller which represents the setpoint of the slave automatically adjusted for ratio
or bias. The requirement for balancing the local and remote setpoint signals prior to
placing the slave controller in cascade mode is eliminated.
It may also be desirable for the setpoint of the master to track the master process
variable. This depends on the desirability of permitting the setpoint of the master to
vary indirectly in response to changes at the slave controller.
Cascade Operation in Auto
The cascade master is configured to permit only auto mode as the control element
(valve, air damper, etc.) is directly manipulated by the slave. The auto mode
simplifies operations by ensuring that all mode transfers and manual intervention
can be accomplished exclusively at the slave.
206
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Master Controller
Cascade Operation in Auto
Remote slave
setpoint tracks
master output.
Slave Controller
Local setpoint on
Master.
Figure 91. Auto Cascade Operation
•
The slave setpoint tracks (automatically remains equal to) the slave process
variable while in manual. This feature eliminates the need for the slave to
respond immediately to any deviation when the mode is changed from manual
to auto (cascade). Without setpoint tracking, the response to any deviation
would be to ramp the slave output at the reset rate.
•
The output of the master tracks the setpoint of the slave while the slave is in
manual. This ensures that the local (slave) setpoint and remote setpoint (master
output) are in balance prior to placing the slave loop in cascade (auto) mode.
•
The setpoint of the master tracks the master process variable while the slave is
in manual. This causes the setpoint of the master to vary indirectly in response
to manual output changes in the slave loop. When the system is switched to
auto, the master setpoint switches from track to local, and there is no process
upset because the track function eliminates any deviation in the master loop.
•
Since the control element is directly manipulated by the slave, the master is
3BUR002418-600 A
207
Viewing Alarms on MOD Loop Displays
Section 8 Operation Examples
configured for automatic mode only. This ensures that all mode transfers and
manual intervention can be accomplished exclusively at the slave.
Viewing Alarms on MOD Loop Displays
Alarms can be configured for each control loop to respond to an alarm condition on
the process variable, the control output, and the deviation between the setpoint and
process value (as a normalized measured value into the PID FCM). Alarm types can
be high, high high, low, low low or limit alarms. The parameters of these alarms can
be adjusted during operation on the loop detail display.
208
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Viewing Alarms on MOD Loop Displays
CCF Control Loop Faceplate with Alarms
[Pv] indicates that this display applies to the measured
variable while the colored background shows an active
alarm. The Pv field color blinks if the alarm is
unacknowledged.
The Pv bar graph indicates that the alarm is activated by
a high input. Alarm trip point on bar graph is indicated by
matching colored marker.
[Out] indicates that this display applies to the control
output. An output alarm is activated by reaching the
output limit. Flashing background indicates that the
alarm is active and has not been acknowledged.
Acknowledge all alarms for a tag at once
using either the active Alarm Acknowledge
button, or by using Acknowledge in the
context menu.
Indicates an active acknowledged alarm
(current value is outside the trip point). Field
colors stop blinking.
Indicates an unacknowledged alarm that has
returned to normal (current value is inside the
trip point). Acknowledge the alarm by
selecting this button.
Background returns to normal when alarm is inactive
and acknowledged.
3BUR002418-600 A
209
Viewing Alarms on MOD Loop Displays
Section 8 Operation Examples
Setpoint/Process Deviation Alarm Display
This display is set to alarm on the deviation between the
PID setpoint and the normalized measured value input
to the PID.
[D] indicates that the alarm is activated by increasing
deviation. Flashing background indicates that the alarm
is active and has not been acknowledged.
Acknowledge all alarms for a tag at once
using either the active Alarm Acknowledge
button, or by using Acknowledge in the
context menu.
Steady colored background indicates an active
acknowledged alarm (current value is outside the trip
point).
Background returns to normal when alarm is inactive
and acknowledged.
210
3BUR002418-600 A
Section 8 Operation Examples
Viewing Abnormal State on MOD Loop Displays
Viewing Abnormal State on MOD Loop Displays
The Abnormal State field specifies whether the system should check the loop for an
abnormal condition.
Indicates and abnormal condition. An
abnormal condition for a continuous loop is
caused by any one of the following conditions:
•
Loop is off
•
An FCM is off
•
Output of an FCM which is not a PID or AM
Controller FCM is in MANUAL
•
Output mode of a PID Controller FCM or an AM
Controller FCM is not in its design state as defined
on its templet
•
Setpoint mode of a PID Controller FCM is not in its
design state as defined on its templet
When set to YES, the system checks for an abnormal
state. When an abnormal state exists, the condition is
displayed as ABNM in the status area.
3BUR002418-600 A
211
Viewing Abnormal State on MOD Loop Displays
212
Section 8 Operation Examples
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Introduction
The runtime versions of the Loop Definition and FCM templets are used to make
tuning changes that cannot be made from the faceplate and device loop displays.
Their information is always current since it comes directly from the active data base.
Some fields are for reference only and are dimmed, other fields are black and are
tunable.
Tuning changes are made to database items by first changing the information on the
templet and then sending the templet information to the database by selecting the
SAVE button. If the save process is not successful, a message describing the
problem is displayed. After corrective action is taken, you can re-try the save
process.
Saving changes both the active database in the subsystem containing the loop and
the installed database. However, the original configuration templets are not
modified until the database is decompiled.
Loop Definition Templet
This section describes the active runtime fields on the Loop Definition Templet.
LOOP DESCRIPTOR Field
Specifies a descriptor for the loop. The descriptor is used with the tag to identify the
loop. Valid entry is: any combination of up to 24 alphanumeric characters. All 24
characters are printed when information for the loop appears on the Alarm/Event
Log, and only the first 12 characters are shown when the descriptor appears on a
display.
3BUR002418-600 A
213
Loop Definition Templet
Appendix A Runtime Templates
PROCESSING RATE Field
Specifies the interval at which the loop is processed (scanned). This field, the
PROCESSING PHASE, and BASERATE fields interact to determine the actual
loop processing rate. Scan Rate (Loop Detail display) equals the Processing Rate
divided by the Base Rate. If the Base Rate is 0.5 and the Processing Rate is 1.0, then
the Scan Rate is 2.0.
Valid entry is in the form of an integer equivalent of hr:min:sec.
The minimum acceptable value is the base rate of the module (0.1 to 1.0) as
specified on the CCF Templet. The maximum value is 65535 times the base rate (if
the base rate is 0.25 then the maximum is 16383.75). The value entered on this field
is automatically rounded up to the next higher multiple of the base rate.
Loop Definition Template entry examples:
Runtime Entry
Configurator Entry
Interpreted as:
0.25
.25
.25 seconds
5
5
5 seconds
257
4:17 or 257
4 minutes 17 seconds
7744
2:09:04 or 7744
2 hours 9 minutes 4 seconds
PROCESSING PHASE Field
Use this field to distribute processing for the loops about the processing interval.
This field, the PROCESSING RATE, and BASERATE fields interact to determine
the loop processing rate. Valid entry is: any integer from 0 to PROCESSING RATE
/ BASERATE - 1 (rounded up to the next higher integer if not a whole number). If
an entry is greater than the valid maximum, the phase is set to 0.
TREND RATE Field
Specifies the rate at which the trend data for the measured variable is collected.
Valid entries are the following number of seconds:
0 (no trend collection), 6, 12, 60, 120, 360, 720, 1440, 2880
214
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Loop Definition Templet
LO ENG. UNIT LIMIT Field
Specifies the lower boundary for the trend graphs. Valid entries are: a decimal
number.
HI ENG. UNIT LIMIT Field
Specifies the upper boundary for the trend graphs. Valid entries are: a decimal
number.
MEASUREMENT UNITS Field
Specifies engineering units labels. The labels are used when the measured variable
of the loop is displayed on operational displays. Valid entry is: any string of up to 6
alphanumeric characters, for example, GPM, PSIG
LOOP STATE Field
This field determines whether the loop is processed. When LOOP STATE is OFF,
the loop processor ignores the loop. Valid entries are: ON (process the loop), OFF
(do not process the loop).
SUPPRESS ALARMS Field
This field determines if the loop processor checks that alarms defined by this loop
are active. Valid entries are: YES (suppress alarms - do not check), NO (do not
suppress alarms).
ENABLE POSTING Field
This field specifies whether posting is enabled for the loop. Posting affects the way
alarm information is presented. Valid entries are: YES (enable posting), NO (disable
posting).
3BUR002418-600 A
215
Loop Definition Templet
Appendix A Runtime Templates
CUTOUT STATE Field
This field defines the state the cutout source must be in to cause cutout. Cutout
allows posting of the alarms to control the loop from an FCM of this or another
loop. Valid entries are:
TRUE
causes cutout when the cutout signal is true (non-zero)
FALSE
causes cutout when the cutout signal is false (zero)
ENABLE HI ALARMS? Field
This field specifies whether the high alarm for the measured variable is enabled.
Valid entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
HI LIMIT Field
This field defines the high alarm limit for the measured variable. The alarm
becomes active when the measured variable becomes equal to or greater than the
high limit and clears when the measured variable decreases to the value of the high
limit minus the alarm deadband. Valid entry is: a decimal number.
HIGH ALARM PRIORITY Field
This field sets the alarm priority which determines how the alarm is displayed. You
can specify different colors to distinguish high, medium, and standard priority alarm
indicators. Valid entries are: STD (standard priority), MED (medium priority),
HIGH (high priority).
ENABLE LO ALARMS? Field
This field determines if the low alarm for the measured variable is enabled. Valid
entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
LO LIMIT Field
This field defines the low alarm limit for the measured variable. The alarm becomes
active when the measured variable becomes equal to or less than the low limit and
clears when the measured variable increases to the value of the low limit plus the
alarm deadband. Valid entry is: a decimal number.
216
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Loop Definition Templet
LO ALARM PRIORITY Field
This field specifies the priority level for the low alarm. Valid entries are: STD
(standard priority), MED (medium priority), HIGH (high priority).
BAD MEASURE ALARMS? Field
This field specifies whether the bad data quality alarm for the measured variable is
enabled. The alarm becomes active whenever the data quality of the measured
variable becomes BAD. Valid entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the
alarm).
BAD ALARM PRIORITY Field
This field specifies the priority level for the bad data quality alarm. Valid entries are:
STD (standard priority), MED (medium priority), HIGH (high priority).
ENABLE RATE ALARMS? Field
This field specifies whether the rate alarm for the measured variable is enabled. The
rate alarm becomes active when the measured variable changes by an amount
greater than the specified rate limit from one loop processing scan to the next. Valid
entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
Usage of rate alarms could cause inconsistency of display for other alarms on any
given tag. It is recommended to not use rate alarms.
RATE LIMIT Field
This field defines the rate alarm limit for the measured variable. The alarm becomes
active when the variable changes at a rate greater than the limit. Valid entry is: a
number in engineering units, representing the greatest amount the variable can
change per second.
RATE ALARM PRIORITY Field
This field specifies the priority level for the rate alarm. Valid entries are: STD
(standard priority), MED (medium priority), HIGH (high priority).
3BUR002418-600 A
217
Loop Definition Templet
Appendix A Runtime Templates
ENGU ALARM DEADBAND Field
This field defines a deadband for the high, low, high high, and low low alarms on the
measured variable. It also becomes the deadband for any setpoint low or setpoint
high alarm for the loop. Valid entry is: a floating point number in the engineering
units of the loop.
ENABLE HIHI ALARMS? Field
This field specifies whether the high high alarm for the measured variable is
enabled. This is a second high alarm level for the measured variable. For example,
the high alarm for a flow is set at 200 GPM and the high high alarm is set at 230
GPM. When the flow becomes equal to or higher than 200 GPM, the high alarm
becomes active. If the flow increases to a rate equal to or larger than 230, both the
high high and the high alarms are active. Valid entries are: YES (enable the alarm),
NO (disable the alarm).
HIHI LIMIT Field
This field defines the high high alarm limit for the measured variable. The alarm
becomes active when the measured variable becomes equal to or greater than the
high high limit and clears when the variable decreases to the value of the high high
limit minus the alarm deadband. Valid entry is: a decimal number.
HIHI ALARM PRIORITY Field
This field specifies the priority level for the high high alarm. Valid entries are: STD
(standard priority), MED (medium priority), HIGH (high priority).
ENABLE LOLO ALARMS? Field
This field specifies whether the low low alarm for the measured variable is enabled.
This is a second low alarm level for the measured variable. For example, the low
alarm for a flow is set at 100 GPM and the low low alarm is set at 80 GPM. When
the flow becomes equal to or less than 100 GPM, the low alarm becomes active. If
the flow decreases to a rate equal to or lower than 80, both the low low and the low
alarm are active. Valid entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
218
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Loop Definition Templet
LOLO LIMIT Field
This field defines the low low alarm limit for the measured variable. The alarm
becomes active when the measured variable becomes equal to or less than the low
low limit and clears when the measured variable increase to the value of the low low
limit plus the alarm deadband. Valid entry is: a decimal number.
LOLO ALARM PRIORITY Field
This field specifies the priority level for the low low alarm. Valid entries are: STD
(standard priority), MED (medium priority), HIGH (high priority).
UNIT ID Field
This field assigns the loop to a unit. This is useful for systems that use the History
software. The alarm/event history messages for all loops in a unit are collected and
stored in the same file. If a unit assignment is not made for a loop, the History
Services software stores alarm/event history messages for the loop in a default unit
file. Valid entry is: the name of a unit as defined in the TEMPLET NAME field on
the Unit Master Templet for the unit.
COMP MODE RESTRICT Field
COMP MODE (computer mode) is used to specify how certain PID or an AM
controller loop parameters are handled. During configuration of the Loop Definition
Templet, you can set loop control to either restricted or not restricted. There are two
entries for this field. They are: NO (No restrictions on control of the protected
attributes. The computer mode feature is used.), YES (Control of the protected
attributes is restricted to either the operator or the computer. Computer control
indicates that a TCL program or a program running on a VAX™, IBM PC™ or
MODCOMP computer attached to the MOD 300 control system, is manipulating
PID or AM parameters.)
ABNORMAL STATE Field
This field specifies whether the system should check the loop for an abnormal
condition. An abnormal condition for a continuous loop is caused by any one of the
following conditions:
3BUR002418-600 A
219
Loop Definition Templet
Appendix A Runtime Templates
•
Loop is off
•
An FCM is off
•
Output of an FCM which is not a PID or AM Controller FCM is in MANUAL
•
Output mode of a PID Controller FCM or an AM Controller FCM is not in its
design state as defined on its templet
•
Setpoint mode of a PID Controller FCM is not in its design state as defined on
its templet
Valid entries are:
YES
system checks for an abnormal state. If an abnormal state exists,
the NORMSTAT attribute is set to 1 and the status area shows
ABNM on the operational displays.
NO
system does not check for an abnormal state.
DMND PROCESSING MODE Field
This field is specifies whether the specified loop(s) are processed when the loop is
processed normally or when it is demand scanned, or both. Valid entries are:
NONE
no extra processing
NORMAL process loops in the LOOPS TO PROCESS edit window when
this loop is normally scanned
DEMAND process loops in LOOPS TO PROCESS edit window when this
loop is demand scanned
BOTH
process loops in LOOPS TO PROCESS edit window when this
loop is demand scanned or normally scanned
LOOPS TO PROCESS Edit Window
This edit window lists the loops to be processed in conjunction with the DMND
PROCESSING MODE field and the # LOOPS TO PRESCAN field. Valid entries
are: up to 5 loop tags. Each line in the edit window can hold one tag. Do not enter
the tag of the loop being configured. Up to five levels of nesting are allowed, that is,
loops in the edit window demand process other loops, and so on.
220
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Device Loop Templet
Device Loop Templet
This section describes the active runtime fields on the Device Loop Templet. Select
the Loop FCM Display and then the device block to get the runtime version of the
Device Loop Templet. Use the fields at the bottom of the Loop FCM Display to
make State, Mode and Command changes.
LOOP DESCRIPTOR Field
This field specifies a loop descriptor. The descriptor is a label included on
operational displays and the Alarm/Event Log. This field does not need a unique
entry, so more than one loop can have the same descriptor.
Valid entry is:
any combination of up to 24 alphanumeric characters. All 24 characters are
printed when information for the loop appears on the Alarm/Event Log, but
only the first 12 characters are shown when the descriptor appears on a display.
PROCESSING RATE Field
This field specifies the loop processing rate. This field and the CCF BASE RATE
field interact to determine the loop processing rate. Scan Rate (Loop Detail display)
equals the Processing Rate divided by the Base Rate. If the Base Rate is 0.5 and the
Processing Rate is 1.0, then the Scan Rate is 2.0.
Valid entry is in the form of an integer equivalent of hr:min:sec. The range is 0.100
second (min.) to 65535 times the base rate (max.). Processing rate must be greater
than or equal to the CCF base rate (0.1 to 1.0). This field is automatically rounded
up to the next higher multiple of the base rate.
Device Loop Template entry examples:
Runtime Entry
Configurator Entry
Interpreted as:
0.25
.25
.25 seconds
5
5
5 seconds
257
4:17 or 257
4 minutes 17 seconds
7744
2:09:04 or 7744
2 hours 9 minutes 4 seconds
3BUR002418-600 A
221
Device Loop Templet
Appendix A Runtime Templates
PROCESSING PHASE Field
This field allows for even distribution of loop processing about the processing
interval. How this field, the PROCESSING PHASE field, and BASE RATE field of
the CCF Templet interact to determine the loop processing rate.
Valid entry is:
any integer from 0 to (PR/BR-1 rounded up to the next higher integer) where
PR is the processing rate of the loop and BR is the base rate of the module
containing the loop. If an entry greater than (PR/BR-1) is made, a compiler
warning is generated when the data base is compiled and the phase is set to 0.
INVERTED INPUTS Field
The INVERTED INPUTS field is used to make modifications to the device handling
algorithm by changing the bit patterns of the feedback (input) signals.
Valid entry is a decimal number identifying which bits are inverted.
Example:
If a device type supports the following 3 feedback states,
1010
1001
0101
entering a 4 to the INVERTED INPUTS field would invert bit 3 (the binary
equivalent of decimal 4) so the resulting feedback states are:
1110
1101
0001
Similarly, entering a 10 would invert bits 4 and 2 (the binary equivalent of 10).
INVERTED OUTPUTS Field
This field is used to make modifications to the device handling algorithm by
changing the bit patterns of the output signals.
222
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Device Loop Templet
Valid entry is:
a decimal number identifying which bits are inverted. See the description of the
INVERTED INPUTS field for an example of inverting bits.
TRANSITION OVERRIDE Field
A transition timeout occurs when the system issues a command to a device and the
device does not go to the proper state within the time specified by the TIMER field.
The TRANSITION OVERRIDE field specifies the action applied to the device
command (DEV_CMND) when a transition timeout occurs.
Valid entries are:
NONE
no change
STATE
set to entry in the DEVICE STATE field (DEV_STAT). If
STATE is specified, but the current state does not correspond
to a valid command, the action taken is the entry in the SAFE
COMMAND field, if a command is specified in that field.
SAFE CMD
action taken is the entry in the SAFE COMMAND field
PREVIOUS CMD
set to the last successful previous command
SPECIAL CMD
set to command specified in the SPECIAL COMMAND field
LOOP STATE Field
This field determines whether the loop is processed. When LOOP STATE is OFF,
the loop processor ignores the loop. The configuration entry is the initial loop state
for the loop.
Valid entries are:
ON
process the loop
OFF
do not process the loop
3BUR002418-600 A
223
Device Loop Templet
Appendix A Runtime Templates
ALARM PRIORITY Field
This field specifies the priority level for any alarms occurring for the device.
Valid entries are:
HIGH
high (priority 1)
MED
medium (priority 2)
STD
standard (priority 3)
POSTING ENABLE Field
This field indicates whether posting is enabled for the loop. Posting affects the way
alarm information is presented at the Operator Stations or Multibus-based consoles
and on the Alarm/Event Log.
Valid entries are:
YES
enable posting
NO
disable posting
SUPPRESS ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the loop processor checks to see if the alarms defined by
this loop are active.
Valid entries are:
YES
suppress alarms (do not check)
NO
do not suppress alarms
DEVICE OVERRIDE Field
This field overrides the feedback timer. When set to YES, there are no Timeout
Alarms for the device. See the description of the TIMER field for a description of
Timeout Alarms.
Valid entries are:
NO_CHECK
224
override the feedback timer
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
NORMAL
Device Loop Templet
do not override the feedback timer
SIMULATION MODE Field
This field facilitates testing and simulating device situations with TCL or a host
computer. When the Simulation Mode is ON, the device loop does not perform
inputs and outputs. When it is OFF, inputs and outputs are handled in the normal
manner.
This field defines the initial value of the Simulation Mode. During runtime, you can
turn the mode ON or OFF via the Loop/FCM Display for the device loop. You can
also change the mode by TCL or by programs run on a host computer.
The effect of the Simulation Mode on device processing depends on the state of the
DEVICE OVERRIDE field on the Device Loops Templet.
Valid entries are:
ON
device simulation mode is on
OFF
device simulation mode is off
INITIAL MODE Field
This field determines the output mode for the loop at the start-up.
Valid entries are:
AUTO
loop is under the control of TCL or a supervisory package
MAN
operator determines output
INITIAL COMMAND Field
This field specifies the command sent to the device upon start-up and the warmstart
action.
Valid entries are:
•
any of the valid commands defined by the descriptor set for the device
•
no entry (blank field) sends out a 0 when the device loop goes on-line
•
NO COMMAND sends out nothing, that is, there is no processing on start-up.
3BUR002418-600 A
225
Device Loop Templet
Appendix A Runtime Templates
This is often used when the device loop interacts with a programmable
controller over a PC interface. The entry NO COMMAND is used to insure the
device loop does not affect the programmable controller when the device loop
goes on-line.
ABNORMAL OVERRIDE Field
This field specifies the action to take if an abnormal state change timeout occurs. If
a device changes state when no command was issued to the device, the abnormal
timer starts counting down from the amount of time specified in the ABNORMAL
TIMER field. If it reaches 0, the action specified in this field is applied to the device
command parameter (DEV_CMND).
Valid entries are:
NONE
no change to device command, but abnormal state change
alarm is generated
STATE
device command (DEV_CMND) is set to value of Device
State (DEV_STAT), abnormal state change alarm is
generated
SAFE COMMAND
device command (DEV_CMND) is set to entry in the SAFE
COMMAND field, abnormal state change alarm is generated
NONE/NA
no change, no abnormal state change alarm
STATE/NA
set to value of Device State (DEV_STAT), no abnormal state
change alarm
SAFE/NA
set to entry in the SAFE COMMAND field, no abnormal
state change alarm
PREVIOUS CMD
set to last successful previous command
SPECIAL CMD
device command (DEV_CMND) is set to entry in the
SPECIAL COMMAND field
ABNORMAL TIMER Field
This field specifies the amount of time the abnormal timer is set to when an
abnormal state change occurs. See the description of the ABNORMAL OVERRIDE
226
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Device Loop Templet
field. If you want the specified abnormal override actions to occur, you must enter a
non-zero entry. Abnormal state change alarms will occur (if the device is so
configured), regardless of the entry in this field.
Valid entry is an amount of time in whole seconds.
SECONDARY TIMER Field
This field is used when the device loop uses a user-defined TCL device handling
algorithm. It sets the initial time for a countdown timer used by the TCL program
which sets up the user-defined device algorithm.
Valid entry is an amount of time in whole seconds.
TIMER Field
This field sets the time for the device loop's feedback timer. When the loop sends a
command to the device, the feedback timer starts counting down. The loop starts
checking its input to see if the device has gone to the desired state. A timeout alarm
is generated if the device has not entered the desired state by the time the timer
expires.
Valid entry is an amount of time in whole seconds.
DEV INTERLOCK ENABLE Field
This field specifies whether the device interlock is enabled or disabled. When it is
enabled, the result of the FCM named in the DEV INTERLOCK SOURCE field
determines whether the device is locked. When the result goes true the device is
locked and the only possible command entry is the one specified in the
PERMITTED COMMAND field.
Valid entries are:
YES
enable the interlock
NO
disable the interlock
3BUR002418-600 A
227
Device Loop Templet
Appendix A Runtime Templates
SPECIAL COMMAND Field
This field specifies the command automatically sent to the device as part of
transition override. See the description of the TRANSITION OVERRIDE field for
an explanation of this feature.
Valid entry is:
a command from the descriptor set defined for the device on its Device
Descriptor Templet
SAFE COMMAND Field
This field specifies the command automatically sent to the device as part of
transition override or abnormal override. See the descriptions of the TRANSITION
OVERRIDE field and the ABNORMAL OVERRIDE field for explanations of these
features.
Valid entry is:
a command from the descriptor set defined for the device on its Device
Descriptor Templet
PERMITTED COMMAND Field
This field specifies the only possible command sent to the device as part of device
interlock. See the description of the DEV INTERLOCK ENABLE field for an
explanation of this feature.
Valid entry is:
a command from the descriptor set defined for the device on its Device
Descriptor Templet
REVERT ENABLE Field
This field specifies whether or not revert is enabled. When it is enabled, after the
operator or a program changes the device command (DEV_CMND) state,
DEV_CMND is automatically changed to the command specified in the REVERT
COMMAND field. The revert command is an internal mechanism only and is not
sent to the device, that is, no field changes.
228
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Device Loop Templet
Valid entries are:
YES
enable
NO
disable
REVERT COMMAND Field
This field specifies the command to which DEV_CMND is automatically set as part
of revert.
Valid entry is:
a command from the descriptor set defined for the device on its Device
Descriptor Templet
CUTOUT ENABLE Field
This field specifies whether cutout is enabled for the loop. Cutout allows an FCM of
this or another loop to control the posting of the alarms.
Valid entry is:
YES
enable the cutout feature
NO
disable the cutout feature
OUTPUT ERROR ACTION Field
This field specifies the actions taken when the output driver fails.
Valid entries are:
NOTHING
continue normal processing
GOTO BACKUP
processing goes to the Backup Controller Module if one is
present. This option shuts down CCF processing in a
Multibus subsystem when the driver fails.
LOOP OFF
turn the loop off
3BUR002418-600 A
229
Device Loop Templet
Appendix A Runtime Templates
LOG STATE CHANGES Field
This field provides the means to enable or disable logging of state changes for this
device (that is, an audit trail of device state change messages in a historical archive).
Valid entries are:
YES
log state changes for this device. Each time the device loop is
scanned the old and new states are determined. If the old and new
states differ, an attempt is made to send a state change message to
the Alarm/Event package which sends the message to the History
node. If memory cannot be allocated for the state change message,
the History node will display, NOCOMMAND in place of the
missing device states. This indicates to the operator that at least one
state change was not logged.
NO
do not log state changes for this device
DMND PROCESSING MODE Field,
# LOOPS TO PRESCAN Field, and
LOOPS TO PROCESS Field
The DMND PROCESSING MODE field, # LOOPS TO PRESCAN field, and
LOOPS TO PROCESS fields allow you to specify up to 5 loops to process along
with this loop. The DMND PROCESSING MODE field is used to specify whether
the loops are processed when this loop is normally processed or when it is demand
scanned, or both. The # LOOPS TO PRESCAN field determines how many of the
listed loops are scanned before this loop and how many are scanned after. The
LOOPS TO PROCESS fields list the loops for this type of processing.
Valid entries for the DMND PROCESSING MODE field are:
230
NONE
no extra processing
NORMAL
process loops as specified in the LOOPS TO PROCESS fields when
this loop is normally scanned
DEMAND
process loops as specified in the LOOPS TO PROCESS fields when
this loop is demand scanned
BOTH
process loops as specified in the LOOPS TO PROCESS fields when
this loop is demand or normally scanned
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
PID Controller FCM
PID Controller FCM
This section describes the active runtime fields on the controller FCM templets.
The PID controller FCM is treated in a different manner from other FCMs because
the PID Controller FCM Templet can have children. These children are the Adaptive
Gain and Adaptive Reset Templets. When you fill in a templet planning form for a
PID controller, the entry you make to the ADAPTIVE CONTROL field determines
whether you need to fill in the Adaptive Gain and/or Adaptive Reset templets.
If the entry to the ADAPTIVE GAIN field is:
GAIN
fill in an Adaptive Gain Templet
RESET fill in an Adaptive Reset Templet
BOTH
fill in an Adaptive Gain and an Adaptive Reset Templet
NONE
no Adaptive Templets are needed
PROCESSING RATE Field
The field indicates the multiple of the loop processing rate at which the controller
algorithm is executed. If the default (1) is used, the FCM is processed each time the
loop is processed. If the field is changed to 2, the FCM is processed every second
time the loop is processed. Valid entry is an integer multiple of the loop processing
rate specified on the Loop Definition Templet. For example, if the value of this field
is 3 and the loop processing rate is 4 seconds, the controller algorithm is processed
every 12 seconds.
BASE GAIN Field
This field specifies the gain (proportional response) in a fixed gain controller. If no
adaptive functions are turned on, the base gain is the active gain of the FCM, and the
FCM operates as a fixed gain controller. When an adaptive gain function is turned
on, all changes in active gain due to the algorithm for that function are based on the
base gain. Valid entry is a decimal number.
3BUR002418-600 A
231
PID Controller FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
BASE RESET Field
This field specifies the base value for the reset. If no adaptive functions are turned
on, the base reset is the active reset of the FCM. When an adaptive function is turned
on, all changes in active reset due to the algorithm for that function are based on the
base reset. Valid entry is a decimal number.
PREACT TIME Field
This field specifies the Pre-act time value. Valid entry is a value set between 0 and
32 minutes.
INTEGRAL TYPE Field
This field specifies the type of integral (reset) control action. Valid entries are:
NONE
reset response is turned off.
STD
reset response is turned on and is operating with the standard
algorithm. It is used with either adaptive gain or adaptive reset
and/or external feedback. Manual reset must be turned off.
MICROSCAN - reset response is turned on and is operating with the
Microscan algorithm. It is used with either adaptive gain or adaptive reset, but
not with external feedback. Manual reset must be turned off.
LIMITED OUTPUT MODES Field
This field specifies whether the output limits are applied to the manual output, track
output, and/or auto output signals. Valid entries are: NONE, MAN, AUTO,
AUTO/MAN, TRK, MAN/TRK, AUTO/TRK, ALL
CONTROLLER ACTION Field
This field specifies whether the FCM output is direct or reverse acting. Valid entries
are:
DIRECT - output of FCM increases as input to FCM increases
REVERSE - output of FCM decreases as input to FCM increases
232
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
PID Controller FCM
PROCESS HIGH VALUE Field
This field gives the value of the process input corresponding to 100.0% of the range.
Valid entry is a decimal value.
PROCESS LOW VALUE Field
This field gives the value of the process input corresponding to 0.0% of the range.
Valid entry is a decimal value.
INITIAL MODE Field
This field specifies the output mode at start-up time. Valid entries are:
MAN - start in the Manual mode
AUTO - start in the Auto mode
INITIAL OUTPUT Field
This field specifies the value of the output at startup time. Valid entry is a value in
percent.
INITIAL SETPOINT Field
This field indicates the value of the setpoint at start-up time. Valid entry is a value
scaled in engineering units
INITIAL SETPT MODE Field
This field specifies the setpoint mode at start-up time. Valid entries are:
LOC - local setpoint mode
REM - remote setpoint mode
LIMITED SETPT MODES Field
This field specifies the setpoint modes to which the setpoint limits are applied. Valid
entries are: NONE, LOC, TRK, REM, RMP, TRK/REM, TRK/RMP, REM/RMP,
3BUR002418-600 A
233
PID Controller FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
LOC/TRK/REM, LOC/TRK/RMP, LOC/TRK, LOC/REM/RMP, LOC/REM,
TRK/REM/RMP, LOC/RMP, ALL
MANUAL RESET MODE Field
This field specifies whether the manual reset control action is used and whether it is
used for bumpless transfers. If it is specified as BALANCE, the value of the manual
reset is automatically adjusted by the system to provide bumpless transfers when
switching to the Auto output mode. Valid entries are:
OFF - manual reset response is turned off
BALANCE - manual reset response is enabled and used to provide bumpless
transfers to Auto mode
NO BALANCE - manual reset response is enabled but not used to provide
bumpless transfers
MANUAL RESET VALUE Field
This field specifies the initial value of the manual reset. Valid entry is a value
between -127 and 127%.
MAN RESET HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies the high limit for the manual reset value. Valid entry is a value
between -127 and 127%.
MAN RESET LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the low limit for the manual reset value. Valid entry is a value
between -127 and 127%.
TRACK ACTIVATE STATE Field
This field specifies the state the track activator must be in for tracking to occur.
Valid entries are: TRUE, FALSE.
234
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
PID Controller FCM
INTERACTIVE FORM Field
This field specifies the method to multiply the proportional gain of the FCM by the
integral. Valid entries are: YES (use interactive form), NO (use non-interactive
form).
INTERACTIVE FORM: Output = (G + G * (integral term)) * derivative term
NONINTERACTIVE FORM: Output = (G + integral term) * derivative term
ERROR SQUARED OPTION Field
This field specifies whether the integral calculation uses the error signal or square of
the error signal. Valid entries are:
NO
integral calculation uses the error signal
YES
integral calculation uses the square of the error signal
GAIN LIMIT Field
This field defines a limit for the gain of the controller above which a low pass filter
is activated. Valid entry is a value set between 0.0 and 125.0
FF/FB MODE Field
The feedforward and feedback options are specified in this field. Valid entries are:
FF
use feedforward
FB
use feedback
FF/FB
use feedforward and feedback
EXT FEEDBACK ENABLE Field
This field specifies whether the external feedback function is enabled. Valid entries
are:
3BUR002418-600 A
NO
feedback function is off
YES
feedback function is on
235
PID Controller FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
BAD INPUTS ACCEPTED Field
This field specifies whether an input with BAD data quality is treated as if the data
quality is GOOD. Valid entries are:
NO
do not accept bad inputs
YES
accept bad inputs
ACTION ON BAD INPUT Field
This field specifies the action to take if the controller input signal goes to BAD data
quality. Valid entries are:
FCM OFF controller FCM is turned off
MAN OUT controller FCM goes to the Manual output mode
NONE
FCM continues processing according to its configuration
ACTION ON BAD SETPT Field
This field specifies the action to take if the setpoint signal goes to a BAD data
quality. Valid entries are:
NONE
no special action is taken
MAN OUT output mode is switched to Manual
LOC SPT
setpoint mode goes to Local
FCM OFF FCM is turned off
SETPOINT RETURN MODE Field
This field specifies the setpoint mode to enter when the mode returns from Track.
Valid entries are:
PREVIOUS go to the mode active before the setpoint went to Track
236
LOCAL
go to the Local mode
REMOTE
go to the Remote mode
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
PID Controller FCM
SETPT VALUE ON FAIL Field
This field specifies the setpoint value in effect upon a remote link failure. Valid
entry is a value in engineering units.
CHANGE SETPT ON FAIL Field
This field specifies whether a new setpoint value is supplied upon a remote link
failure. Valid entries are:
NO
do not change setpoint
YES
change setpoint
OUTPUT RETURN MODE Field
This field specifies the output mode to enter when the mode returns from Track.
Valid entries are:
PREVIOUS go to the mode active before the output began tracking
MANUAL go to the Manual mode
AUTO
go to the Auto mode
OUTPUT MODE ON FAIL Field
This field specifies the output mode to enter upon a remote link failure. Valid entries
are:
PREVIOUS go to the mode active before the remote link failure
MANUAL go to the Manual mode
AUTO
go to the Auto mode
NO CHANGE remain in the present mode
OUTPUT VALUE ON FAIL Field
This field specifies the output value effective upon a remote link failure if the entry
in the CHANGE OUTPT ON FAIL field is YES. Valid entry is a value in percent.
3BUR002418-600 A
237
PID Controller FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
CHANGE OUTPUT ON FAIL Field
This field specifies if a new output value is supplied upon a remote link failure.
Valid entries are:
NO
do not change the output value
YES
change the output value
LINK TIME-OUT Field
This field specifies the initial time interval for the watchdog timer. The timer is used
to determine whether a supervisory program can continue to control the loop. Valid
entry is a number of seconds
BALANCE MODE Field
This field indicates whether the system can manipulate the remote setpoint ratio
and/or the remote setpoint bias to prevent process bumps when the setpoint state is
switched to remote. Valid entries are:
RATIO
FCM automatically manipulates ratio value of remote setpoint to
balance transitions to Remote
BIAS
controller automatically manipulates bias value of remote setpoint
to balance transitions to Remote
BOTH
the system can manipulate both bias and ratio
OFF
the balance feature is not used
BIAS MODE Field
This field specifies which remote setpoint bias value the FCM is presently using.
The configured entry is the initial bias mode. During runtime, this field changes
each time the mode is switched at the console. Valid entries are:
238
REM
bias comes from the remote bias source
LOC
bias is from the local source (entered by operator at console)
OFF
controller does not use a bias signal
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
PID Controller FCM
LOCAL BIAS Field
This field specifies the local bias value for the FCM. The configured entry is the
initial local bias. During runtime, you can enter the local bias value at the console.
Valid entry is a decimal value.
LIMITED BIAS MODES Field
This field specifies the bias limits applied to the bias modes. Valid entries are:
NONE
LOC
limits apply to the local bias mode
REM
limits apply to the remote bias mode
LOC/REM limits apply to local and remote bias modes
BIAS HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies the high limit for the bias values. This limit only applies to the
bias modes specified in the LIMITED BIAS MODES field.Valid entry is a
percentage value.
BIAS LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the low limit for the bias values. This limit only applies to the
bias modes specified in the LIMITED BIAS MODES field. Valid entry is a
percentage value.
RATIO MODE Field
This field specifies which remote setpoint ratio value the controller is presently
using. The configured entry is the initial ratio mode. During runtime, the contents of
this field change each time the mode is switched from the console. Valid entries are:
3BUR002418-600 A
REMOTE
ratio comes from the remote ratio source
LOCAL
ratio is from the local source (entered by operator at console)
OFF
FCM does not use a ratio signal
239
PID Controller FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
LOCAL RATIO Field
This field specifies the local remote setpoint ratio value for the controller. The
configured entry is the initial local ratio. During runtime, you can change the local
ratio value at the console. Valid entry is a value in engineering units.
LIMITED RATIO MODES Field
This field specifies the ratio modes to which the ratio limits are applied. Valid
entries are:
NONE
LOC
limits apply to the local ratio
REM
limits apply to the remote ratio
LOC/REM limits apply to both modes
RATIO HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies the high limit for the ratio values. This limit only applies to the
ratio modes specified in the LIMITED RATIO MODES field. Valid entry is a value
in engineering units.
RATIO LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the low limit for the ratio values. This limit only applies to the
ratio modes specified in the LIMITED RATIO MODES field. Valid entry is a value
in engineering units.
INC MINIMUM OUTPUT Field
This field specifies the critical value for the incremental PID algorithm. The critical
value is the smallest result of the algorithm that affects the output device. For
instance, when pulse duration outputs drive the output device, the critical value is
the smallest result of the PID algorithm that turns on a pulse duration output. When
the result is less than the critical value, the value is stored and the result has no
effect. On the next scan, the stored value is used to calculate a new result. Unused
results are stored until the cumulative result is large enough to use.
240
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
PID Controller FCM
The following equation is used to determine the critical value for a pulse duration
output:
CV = (100 x DO_RATE)
(H)
where:
DO_RATE
is the resolution in milliseconds for the pulse digital outputs (as
specified on the Controller or Multibus I/O Templet)
H
is the 100% (HI_COUNT) value for the pulse digital outputs
(as defined on the Pulse Duration Output Templet)
When the critical value is zero, there is no adjustment for ineffective results. To
make an adjustment for ineffective results, the integral (reset) control action must be
turned on. Valid entry is a value, in engineering units, which must be greater than or
equal to 0 (zero)
INC LOWER DEADBAND Field
This field specifies the lower boundary of the deadband for the incremental PID
algorithm. Valid entry is a value, in engineering units, which must be less than or
equal to 0 (zero)
INC UPPER DEADBAND Field
This field specifies the upper boundary of the deadband for the incremental PID
algorithm. Valid entries are a value, in engineering units, which must be greater than
or equal to 0 (zero)
OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies the high limit for the output signal. It is used to limit the output
when the FCM is in the modes specified in the LIMITED OUTPUT MODES field.
It is also the alarm limit if the entry in the OUTPUT HIGH ALARMS? field is YES.
Valid entry is a number between -14.0 and 114.0%.
3BUR002418-600 A
241
PID Controller FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
OUTPUT LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the low limit for the output signal. It is used to limit the output
when the FCM is in the modes specified in the LIMITED OUTPUT MODES field.
It is also the alarm limit if the entry in the OUTPUT LOW ALARMS? field is YES.
Valid entry is a number between -14.0 and 114.0%.
OUTPUT ALARM DB Field
This field is used to define a deadband for the output alarm of this FCM. Valid entry
is a floating point number in percent of range.
OUTPUT RATE LIMIT Field
This field specifies the highest allowed rate of change of the output signal per
second. It is used when the FCM is in the modes specified in the LIMITED
OUTPUT MODES field (except for MAN, OUTPUT RATE LIMIT is not
applicable for manual mode). It is also the alarm limit if the entry in the OUTPUT
RATE ALARMS? field is YES. Valid entry is a number between 0.0 and 128.0%.
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies the high limit for the setpoint values. This limit only applies to
the setpoint modes specified in the LIMITED SETPT MODES field. It is also used
as an alarm limit when the entry in the SETPOINT HIGH ALARMS? field is YES.
Valid entry is a decimal value in engineering units.
SETPOINT LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the low limit for the setpoint values. This limit only applies to
the setpoint modes specified in the LIMITED SETPT MODES field. It is also used
as an alarm limit when the entry in the SETPOINT LOW ALARMS? field is YES.
Valid entry is a decimal value in engineering units.
DEVIATION HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies the high alarm limit for the deviation value (normalized
measured value input to the PID FCM is greater than the PID setpoint by this
242
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
PID Controller FCM
amount). It is used when the entry in the DEVIATION HI ALARMS? field is YES.
Valid entry is a decimal value in engineering units.
DEVIATION LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the low alarm limit for the deviation value (normalized measured
value input to the PID FCM is less than the PID setpoint by this amount). It is used
when the entry in the DEVIATION LOW ALARMS? field is YES. Valid entry is a
decimal value in engineering units.
DEVIATION ALARM DB Field
This field is used to define a deadband for the deviation alarm of this FCM. Valid
entry is a value in engineering units.
OUTPUT HIGH ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the high alarm on the output signal is enabled. If this
field is YES, an alarm occurs when the output is equal to or greater than the value
entered in the OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT field. The alarm clears when the output
decreases to a value equal to or less than the value of the high limit minus the alarm
deadband. Valid entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
OUTPUT LOW ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the low alarm on the output signal is enabled. If this
field is YES, an alarm occurs when the output is equal to or less than the value
entered on the OUTPUT LOW LIMIT field. The alarm clears when the output
increases to a value equal to or greater than the value of the low limit plus the alarm
deadband. Valid entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
OUTPUT RATE ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the rate alarm for the output signal is enabled. If this
field is YES, an alarm occurs when the rate of change of the output per second is
equal to or greater than the value entered in the OUTPUT RATE LIMIT field. Valid
entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
3BUR002418-600 A
243
PID Controller FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
BAD OUTPUT ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the bad data quality alarm for the output signal is
enabled. If this field is YES, an alarm occurs when the data quality of the output
goes to BAD. Valid entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
SETPOINT HIGH ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the high alarm for the setpoint signal is enabled. If this
field is YES, an alarm occurs when the output is equal to or greater than the value
entered in the SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT field. Valid entries are: YES (enable the
alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
SETPOINT LOW ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the low alarm for the setpoint signal is enabled. If this
field is YES, an alarm occurs when the setpoint is equal to or less than the value
entered in the SETPOINT LOW LIMIT field. Valid entries are: YES (enable the
alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
BAD SETPOINT ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the bad data quality alarm for the setpoint signal is
enabled. If this field is YES, an alarm occurs when the data quality of the setpoint
goes to BAD. Valid entries are: YES (enable the alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
DEVIATION HI ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the high alarm for the deviation signal is enabled. If this
field is YES, an alarm occurs when the deviation is equal to or greater than the value
entered in the DEVIATION HIGH LIMIT field. Valid entries are: YES (enable the
alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
DEVIATION LOW ALARMS Field
This field specifies whether the low alarm for the deviation signal is enabled. If this
field is YES, an alarm occurs when the deviation is equal to or greater than the value
entered on the DEVIATION LOW LIMIT field. Valid entries are: YES (enable the
alarm), NO (disable the alarm).
244
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Adaptive Gain
Alarm PRIORITY Fields
These following fields specify the priority levels for their respective alarms.
•
OUTPUT HIGH PRIORITY
•
OUTPUT LOW PRIORITY
•
OUTPUT RATE PRIORITY
•
BAD OUTPUT PRIORITY
•
SETPOINT HIGH PRIORITY
•
SETPOINT LOW PRIORITY
•
BAD SETPT PRIORITY
•
DEVN HIGH PRIORITY
•
DEVN LOW PRIORITY
Valid entries are:
STD
standard priority
MED
medium priority
HIGH
high priority
Adaptive Gain
The PID Controller FCM uses adaptive gain and/or adaptive reset to adapt to
changing process conditions. This templet is a child of the PID Controller FCM
Templet.
HIGH LIMIT Field
The field specifies the overall high limit for gain or reset when any adaptive function
is used. Valid entry is a decimal value.
LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the overall low limit for gain or reset when any adaptive function
is used. Valid entry is a decimal value.
3BUR002418-600 A
245
Adaptive Gain
Appendix A Runtime Templates
CONTACT STATE Field
This field specifies on which state of the contacts the gain or reset is adapted by the
contact adaptive function.
Valid entries are:
TRUE
apply the contact adaptive function when the signal is true (closed
contacts - non-zero)
FALSE
apply the contact adaptive function when the signal is false (open
contacts - zero)
CONTACT GAIN Field
This field specifies the factor by which the base gain or reset is multiplied when the
contact adaptive function is applied. Valid entry is a decimal value.
REMOTE HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies the maximum allowed value for the remote variable adaptive
contribution to the overall gain or reset. Valid entry is a decimal number.
REMOTE LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the minimum allowed value for the remote variable adaptive
contribution to the overall gain or reset. Valid entry is a decimal number.
REMOTE UPPER BRKPT Field
This field specifies the upper breakpoint, BP2, for the remote variable adaptive
function. The gain or reset changes when the remote variable becomes greater than
the upper breakpoint.
Valid entry is a decimal value with the same type of units as the remote variable
(eng. units or percent).
246
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Adaptive Gain
REMOTE LOWER BRKPT Field
This field specifies the lower breakpoint, BP1, for the remote variable adaptive
function. The gain or reset changes when the remote variable becomes less than the
lower breakpoint.
Valid entry is decimal value with same type of units as the remote variable
(engineering units or percent).
REMOTE UPPER FACTOR Field
This field specifies the multiplier of the base gain or reset associated with the upper
breakpoint, BP2, of the remote variable adaptive function. Valid entry is a decimal
value.
REMOTE LOWER FACTOR Field
This field specifies the multiplier of the base gain or reset associated with the lower
breakpoint, BP1, of the remote variable adaptive function. Valid entry is a decimal
value.
OUTPUT UPPER BRKPT Field
This field specifies the upper breakpoint, BP2, for the output adaptive function. The
gain or reset starts to change when the size of the output becomes greater than the
upper breakpoint. Valid entry is a decimal value in percent.
OUTPUT LOWER BRKPT Field
This field specifies the lower breakpoint, BP1, for the output adaptive function. The
gain or reset starts to change when the size of the output becomes less than the lower
breakpoint. Valid entry is a decimal value in percent.
OUTPUT UPPER FACTOR Field
This field specifies the multiplier of the base gain or reset associated with the upper
breakpoint, BP2, of the output adaptive function. Valid entry is a decimal value.
3BUR002418-600 A
247
Adaptive Gain
Appendix A Runtime Templates
OUTPUT LOWER FACTOR Field
This field specifies the multiplier of the base gain or reset associated with the lower
breakpoint, BP1, of the output adaptive function. Valid entry is a decimal value.
PROCESS HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies the maximum allowed value for the process adaptive
contribution to the overall gain or reset. Valid entry is a decimal number.
PROCESS LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the minimum allowed value for the process adaptive
contribution to the overall gain or reset. Valid entry is low limit value.
PROCESS UPPER BRKPT Field
This field specifies the upper breakpoint, BP2, for the process adaptive function.
The gain or reset starts to change when the size of the process variable becomes
greater than the upper breakpoint. Valid entry is a decimal value in percent.
PROCESS LOWER BRKPT Field
This field specifies the lower breakpoint, BP1, for the process adaptive function.
The gain or reset changes when the process variable becomes less than the lower
breakpoint. Valid entry is a decimal value in percent.
PROCESS UPPER FACTOR Field
This field specifies the multiplier of the base gain or reset associated with the upper
breakpoint, BP2, of the process adaptive function. Valid entry is a decimal value.
PROCESS LOWER FACTOR Field
This field specifies the multiplier of the base gain or reset associated with the lower
breakpoint, BP1, of the process adaptive function. Valid entry is a decimal value.
248
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Adaptive Reset
ERROR HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies the maximum allowed value for the error adaptive contribution
to the overall gain or reset. Valid entry is the high limit value.
ERROR LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies the minimum allowed value for the error adaptive contribution to
the overall gain or reset. Valid entry is the low limit value.
ERROR UPPER BRKPT Field
This field specifies the upper breakpoint, BP2, for the error adaptive function. The
gain or reset changes when the error becomes greater than the upper breakpoint.
Valid entry is a decimal value in percent.
ERROR LOWER BRKPT Field
This field specifies the lower breakpoint, BP1, for the error adaptive function. The
gain or reset changes when the error becomes less than the lower breakpoint. Valid
entry is a decimal value in percent.
ERROR UPPER FACTOR Field
This field specifies the multiplier of the base gain or reset associated with the upper
breakpoint, BP2, of the error adaptive function. Valid entry is a decimal value.
ERROR LOWER FACTOR Field
This field specifies the multiplier of the base gain or reset associated with the lower
breakpoint, BP1, of the error adaptive function. Valid entry is a decimal value.
Adaptive Reset
The PID Controller FCM uses adaptive gain and/or adaptive reset to adapt to
changing process conditions. This templet is a child of the PID Controller FCM
Templet.
See field description under Adaptive Gain on page 245.
3BUR002418-600 A
249
Auto/Manual Controller FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Auto/Manual Controller FCM
The following tunable fields are the same as in the PID Controller templet:
250
PROCESSING RATE Field
ACTION ON BAD INPUT Field
TRACK ACTIVATE STATE Field
BAD INPUTS ACCEPTED Field
INITIAL MODE Field
INITIAL OUTPUT Field
OUTPUT RETURN MODE Field
LINK TIME-OUT Field
OUTPUT MODE ON FAIL Field
OUTPUT VALUE ON FAIL Field
CHANGE OUTPUT ON FAIL Field
BALANCE MODE Field
BIAS MODE Field
LOCAL BIAS Field
LIMITED BIAS MODES Field
BIAS HIGH LIMIT Field
BIAS LOW LIMIT Field
RATIO MODE Field
LOCAL RATIO Field
LIMITED RATIO MODES Field
RATIO HIGH LIMIT Field
RATIO LOW LIMIT Field
LIMITED OUTPUT MODES Field
OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT Field
OUTPUT LOW LIMIT Field
OUTPUT ALARM DB Field
OUTPUT RATE LIMIT Field
OUTPUT HIGH ALARMS Field
OUTPUT LOW ALARMS Field
OUTPUT RATE ALARMS Field
BAD OUTPUT ALARMS Field
OUTPUT HIGH PRIORITY*
OUTPUT LOW PRIORITY*
OUTPUT RATE PRIORITY*
BAD OUTPUT PRIORITY*
*see Alarm PRIORITY Fields
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Input FCMs
Input FCMs
This section describes the active runtime fields on the input FCM templets.
Common Fields
INITIAL OUTPUT MODE Field
This field determines the output mode for the FCM at startup. Valid entries are:
AUTO
FCM determines output values
MAN
operator determines output values
INITIAL OUTPUT Field
This field determines the result (output value of the FCM) in effect upon startup of
the FCM. Valid entry is a decimal number.
Analog Input FCM
COUNTS - LOWER BOUND Field
This field specifies the lower limit for the range of counts. It corresponds to the
engineering units lower bound. Valid entry is an integer between 0 and 32767.
COUNTS - UPPER BOUND Field
This field specifies the upper limit for the range of raw counts. It corresponds to the
engineering units upper bound. Valid entry is an integer between 0 and 32767.
ENGU - LOWER BOUND Field
This field specifies the engineering units range lower limit. Valid entry is a decimal
number.
3BUR002418-600 A
251
Digital Input FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
ENGU - UPPER BOUND Field
This field specifies the engineering units range upper limit. Valid entry is a decimal
number. See the CCF User’s Guide if the loop receives input from a smart device.
Digital Input FCM
INVERTED INPUTS Field
This field is used to modify the input bit patterns received by the Digital Input FCM.
Valid entry is a decimal number converted to binary bit positions, specifying which
bits are inverted
Pulsed Input FCM
ENGU - LOWER BOUND Field
This field specifies the lower limit of the engineering units range. Valid entry is a
decimal number.
ENGU - UPPER BOUND Field
This field specifies the upper limit of the engineering units range. Valid entry is a
decimal number.
Pulsed Input Time Derivative FCM
CONSTANT Field
This field specifies the scaling constant. You can choose this constant to express the
result in pulses per minute or hour, and so on. Valid entry is a decimal number.
BAD INPUTS ACCEPTED? Field
Specifies whether an input with a BAD data quality is treated as if the data quality
were GOOD. Valid entries are: NO, YES.
252
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Output FCMs
Output FCMs
This section describes the active runtime fields on the output FCM templets.
Common Fields
INITIAL OUTPUT MODE Field or INITIAL MODE Field
These fields indicate the output mode for the loop at start-up and the TRIO
warmstart action. Valid entries are:
AUTO
loop determines output values
MAN
operator determines output values
INITIAL OUTPUT Field
This field determines the initial result (output of the FCM) at start-up of the FCM.
Valid entry is a decimal number.
BAD INPUTS ACCEPTED? Field
This field specifies the data qualities acceptable for the input signal to the FCM and
the action to take if the data quality becomes unacceptable. Valid entries are:
YES
GOOD and BAD are acceptable data qualities
NO
GOOD is the only acceptable data quality for the input
ACTION ON ERROR Field
This field defines the action taken if the FCM is unable to output a valid signal to the
field. Valid entries are:
NOTHING
continue processing the loop as configured
FCM OFF
turn the FCM off
SOURCE OFF
turn the source off
GOTO BACKUP for switchover to Backup Controller in Controller
Subsystems with Backup Controller option. For other
3BUR002418-600 A
253
Analog Output FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Controller and Multibus I/O Subsystems, this choice shuts
down CCF processing when an error condition occurs.
LOOP OFF
turn the loop off
Analog Output FCM
SIGNAL INVERSION Field
This field indicates whether the output signal is inverted before it is sent to the I/O
Module. For details see INPUT SOURCE field in Section 8.2, Parameters Common
To All Output FCMS.
Valid entries are:
YES
invert the signal
NO
do not invert the signal
ENGU OR PERCENT Field
This field specifies whether the FCM input is converted from engineering units or
percent. This determines which scaling equation is used to change input to counts.
Valid entries are:
ENGU
convert input from engineering units
PERCENT convert input from percent
COUNTS - LOWER BOUND Field
This field specifies the raw counts lower limit corresponding to the engineering
units lower bound. Valid entry is an integer between 0 and 32767.
COUNTS - UPPER BOUND Field
This field specifies the raw counts upper limit corresponding to the engineering
units upper bound. Valid entry is an integer between 0 and 32767.
254
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Digital Output FCM
ENGU - LOWER BOUND Field
This field specifies the lower limit of the engineering units range. Valid entry is a
decimal number
ENGU - UPPER BOUND Field
This field specifies the upper limit of the engineering units range. Valid entry is a
decimal number.
UNDER RANGE COUNTS Field and OVER RANGE COUNTS Field
These fields indicate the lowest and highest count values that can be output. Valid
entries are integers between 0 and 4095.
Digital Output FCM
INVERTED OUTPUTS Field
This field makes modifications to the bit patterns output by the Digital Output FCM.
Valid entry is a decimal number translated into binary bit positions, specifying
which bits are inverted.
Pulse Duration Output FCM
COUNTS - UPPER BOUND Field
This field defines the length for the pulse duration (Pulse Duration Output) or the
number of pulses (Pulse Train Output) to treat as 100% of range. Valid entry is an
integer for the pulse duration in milliseconds or an integer for the number of pulses.
Pulse Train Output FCM
COUNTS - UPPER BOUND Field
This field defines the length for the pulse duration (Pulse Duration Output) or the
number of pulses (Pulse Train Output) to treat as 100% of range. Valid entry is an
integer for the pulse duration in milliseconds or an integer for the number of pulses.
3BUR002418-600 A
255
Common Calculator FCM Fields
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Common Calculator FCM Fields
The following fields are common to most all calculator FCMs.
INITIAL MODE Field
This parameter specifies if the output mode of the FCM is set at MAN (manual) or
AUTO.
INITIAL OUTPUT Field
This parameter specifies the result of the FCM calculations and can be changed if
the output mode is manual. There are no state values nor state mnemonics available
for TCL for this parameter.
BAD INPUTS ACCEPTED? Field
This field specifies the data qualities acceptable for the input signal to the FCM and
the action to take if the data quality becomes unacceptable. Valid entries are:
YES
GOOD and BAD are acceptable data qualities
NO
GOOD is the only acceptable data quality for the input
Math Related Calculator FCMs
This section describes the additional active runtime fields on the following math
related calculator FCM templets. See Common Calculator FCM Fields on page 256
for common fields.
256
•
Sum of 4 Inputs
•
Average
•
Polynomial
•
Subtraction
•
Division
•
Natural Logarithm
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
•
Exponentiation
•
Multiplication
•
Absolute Value
Sum of 4 Inputs FCM
Sum of 4 Inputs FCM
The Sum of 4 Inputs FCM finds the sum of up to 4 input signals, each with an
optional scaling constant.
Constant 1 through Constant 4 Fields
These fields specify the values of the constants. Valid entry is any number
Polynomial FCM
The Polynomial FCM allows for polynomial curve fitting linearization for up to a
third order fit.
Constant 1 through Constant 4 Fields
These fields specify the values of the constants. Valid entry is any number
Average FCM
The Average FCM finds the arithmetic average of up to 4 inputs. You can use
constant factors to scale the inputs.
Constant 1 through Constant 4 Fields
These fields specify the values of the constants. Valid entry is any number
MINIMUM # INPUTS Field
This field specifies the minimum number of inputs that must have a data quality of
GOOD for the algorithm to calculate. Valid entries are: 2, 3, 4 or ALL INPUTS.
3BUR002418-600 A
257
Subtraction FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Subtraction FCM
The Subtraction FCM subtracts one input from another. You can use the constant
factors for scaling.
Constant 1 and Constant 2 Fields
These fields specify the values of the constants. Valid entry is any number.
Division FCM
The Division FCM calculates the quotient of two input signals. You can use the
constant factors for scaling.
Constant 1 and Constant 2 Fields
These fields specify the values of the constants. Valid entry is any number.
Natural Logarithm FCM
The Natural Logarithm FCM calculates a scaled natural logarithm for an optionally
scaled input signal. You can use the constant factors for scaling.
Constant 1 and Constant 2 Fields
These fields specify the values of the constants. Valid entry is any number.
Exponentiation FCM
The Exponentiation FCM raises one input signal to a power determined by another
input signal. You can use the constant factors for scaling.
Constant 1 and Constant 2 Fields
These fields specify the values of the constants. Valid entry is any number.
Multiplication FCM
The Multiplication FCM calculates the product of two inputs. You can also use
constants to scale the product.
258
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Absolute Value FCM
Constant 1 Field
This field specifies the values of the constant. Valid entry is any number
Absolute Value FCM
The Absolute Value FCM calculates the absolute value of the input signal.
Scale Compensation Calculator FCMs
This section describes the active runtime fields on the following scale compensation
calculator FCM templets. See Common Calculator FCM Fields on page 256 for
common fields.
•
Modified Square Root
•
Linearization
•
Normalize
•
Inverse Normalize
•
Scale Input
•
Flow Calculation
•
Temperature Compensation
•
Ratio/Bias
Modified Square Root FCM
The Modified Square Root FCM calculates the square root of its input for input
values greater than 2.47% of range. For input values less than 2.47%, including
negative input values, the result is modified to be linear near zero and to handle
negative numbers. The Modified Square Root FCM extracts the square root and
scales the percent value into engineering units.
HI ENG UNITS Field (High Engineering Units)
This field specifies the high limit of the engineering units range. Valid entry is any
number.
3BUR002418-600 A
259
Linearization FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
LO ENG UNITS Field (Low Engineering Units)
This field specifies the low limit of the engineering units range. Valid entry is any
number.
Linearization FCM
This FCM uses the table look-up method to linearize an input. The linearization
tables support thermocouples and RTDs (Resistance Temperature Devices) used by
the system. As an option, the FCM can linearize according to a table defined by you
via the Breakpoint Sets Templet. The result of this FCM is scaled in degrees C
(Celsius), F (Fahrenheit), K (Kelvin), or R (Rankine).
INVERSE AXIS? Field
This field specifies either normal or inverted axis. Valid entries are:
NO
do not invert axis (input value is the x value in the linearization
table, corresponding y value becomes the result)
YES
invert axis (input value is the y value in the linearization table,
corresponding x value becomes the result)
Normalize FCM
The Normalize FCM normalizes a signal from an engineering unit scale to a
dimensionless zero-based scale.
LOW RANGE Field
This field specifies the low range value for the input signal. Valid entry is any
number.
HIGH RANGE Field
This field specifies the top of range value for engineering units range of the result.
Valid entry is any number.
260
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Inverse Normalize FCM
SCALING Field
This field specifies the scaling factor. Valid entry is any number.
Inverse Normalize FCM
The Inverse Normalize FCM converts a value from a normalized, dimensionless,
zero-based scale (percentage) to a value on an engineering units scale.
LOW RANGE Field
This field specifies the low range value for the input signal. Valid entry is any
number.
HIGH RANGE Field
This field specifies the top of range value for engineering units range of the result.
Valid entry is any number.
SCALING Field
This field specifies the scaling factor. Valid entry is any number.
Scale Input FCM
The Scale FCM converts a value from one engineering unit scale to its
corresponding value in another engineering unit scale.
OLD LOW RANGE Field
This field specifies low range value of the input. Valid entry is any number.
OLD HIGH RANGE Field
This field specifies high range value of the input. Valid entry is any number.
NEW LOW RANGE Field
This field specifies low range value of the result. Valid entry is any number.
3BUR002418-600 A
261
Flow Calculation FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
NEW HIGH RANGE Field
This field specifies high range value of the result. Valid entry is any number.
Flow Calculation FCM
This FCM calculates mass and volume flow rates for liquids and gases. Its primary
input is either a differential pressure measurement or a velocity measurement.
STANDARD TEMP Field
This field specifies the standard temperature. Temperature must be absolute
(degrees Rankine). Valid entry is any number.
FLOWING TEMP Field
This field specifies the flow temperature. It is used when TEMP LOC/REM is
LOCAL. The temperature must be absolute (deg. Rankine where deg. Rankine =
deg. Fahrenheit + 459.69). Valid entry is any number greater than 0.
FLOWING PRESSURE Field
This field specifies the flow pressure. It is used when PRES LOC/REM is LOCAL.
Valid entry is any number greater than 0. The entry must be in PSIA.
FLOWING DENSITY Field
This field specifies the flow density. It is used when DEN LOC/REM is LOCAL.
Valid entry is any number greater than 0.
DENSITY SC Field
This field specifies the value for the density at standard conditions. Valid entry is
any number.
SPEC GRAV SC Field
This field specifies the value for specific gravity at standard conditions. Valid entry
is any number.
262
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Temperature Compensation FCM
COEF THERM EXP Field
This field specifies the value for the coefficient of thermal expansion. Valid entry is
any number.
FLOW COEFFICIENT Field
This field specifies the value for the flow coefficient. Valid entry is any number.
Temperature Compensation FCM
The Temperature Compensation FCM calculates temperature compensated
volumetric and mass flow rates for incompressible fluids.
DES TEMP CONSTANT Field
This field specifies the design temperature constant. Valid entry is any number.
FLOW CONSTANT Field
This field specifies the value of the flow constant. Valid entry is any number.
DEN VS TEMP CONSTANT Field
This field specifies the value of the density versus temperature constant. Valid entry
is any number.
VOLUME OR MASS FLOW? Field
This field specifies whether the FCM uses volumetric flow rate or mass flow rate
algorithm. Valid entries are:
MASS
use the mass flow rate algorithm
VOL
use the volumetric flow rate algorithm
Ratio/Bias FCM
The Ratio/Bias FCM is used to apply bias and ratio to a signal. Bias and ratio
sources can be local or remote.
3BUR002418-600 A
263
Time Related Calculator FCMs
Appendix A Runtime Templates
LOCAL BIAS Field
This field specifies the local bias value. It is used when the bias mode is LOCAL.
Valid entry is any number.
LOCAL RATIO Field
This field specifies the local ratio value. It is used when the ratio mode is LOCAL.
Valid entry is any number.
Time Related Calculator FCMs
This section describes the active runtime fields on the following time related
calculator FCM templets. See Common Calculator FCM Fields on page 256 for
common fields.
•
Time Derivative
•
Time Integration
•
First Order Filter
•
Totalizer
•
Lead/Lag Filter
•
Dead Time
•
Dead Time Compensation
•
Timer
•
Counter
•
Delay Timer
Time Derivative FCM
The Time Derivative FCM performs a first order time differentiation on its input.
CONSTANT Field
This field specifies the value of the scaling constant. Valid entry is any number.
264
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Time Integration FCM
Time Integration FCM
The Time Integration FCM performs time integration on its input. The calculation is
a trapezoidal approximation of the integral.
SCALE FACTOR Field
This field specifies the value of the scaling constant. Valid entry is any number.
First Order Filter FCM
The First Order Filter FCM provides a first order lag function.
LAG TIME Field
This field specifies the value of the lag time. Valid entry is an amount of time in
minutes.
Totalizer FCM
The Totalizer FCM calculates a total by adding or subtracting its current input from
the total of the previous input values. You can also compare the total to two userdefined values.
SCALE FACTOR Field
This field specifies the value of the scaling constant. Valid entry is any number.
TRIP POINT 1 Field
This field specifies the value of PREDETERMINED REGISTER NO. 1. Valid entry
is any number greater than or equal to 0.
TRIP POINT 2 Field
This field specifies the value of the PREDETERMINED REGISTER NO. 2. Valid
entry is a number greater than or equal to the TRIP POINT 1 entry.
3BUR002418-600 A
265
Lead/Lag Filter FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
UP OR DOWN Field
This field specifies if the totalizer adds or subtracts each new input from the current
total. Valid entries are:
UP
totalizer adds input
DOWN
totalizer subtracts input
THRESHOLD VALUE Field
This field specifies the threshold value. If the absolute value of the input is lower
than this value, the input is discarded without being applied to the total. Valid entry
is a number greater than or equal to 0.
Lead/Lag Filter FCM
The Lead/Lag Filter FCM provides the capability for combined lead/lag filter
conditioning.
LAG TIME Field
This field specifies the value of the lag time. Valid entry is an amount of time in
minutes.
PREACT TIME Field
This field specifies the value of Pre-act time. Valid entry is an amount of time in
minutes.
PREACT GAIN Field
This field specifies the value of Pre-act gain. Valid entry is any number.
Dead Time FCM
The Dead Time FCM implements a pure dead time.
266
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Dead Time Compensation FCM
Dead Time Compensation FCM
When the process contains a dead time which threatens control loop stability, the
Dead Time Compensation FCM provides a compensated process signal to the loop
controller.
MAX DEAD TIME Field
This field specifies the value of the deadtime time interval. Valid entry is a number
in seconds (the data base holds this number internally in milliseconds).
LAG TIME Field
This field specifies the value of the lag time. Valid entry is a number in minutes.
PREACT TIME Field
This field specifies the value of Pre-act time. Valid entry is a number in minutes.
PREACT GAIN Field
This field specifies the value of Pre-act gain. Valid entry is any number.
Timer FCM
The Timer FCM provides for triggering an action after a specified elapsed time or at
a specified time of day. Both single shot and periodic timing are supported.
PERIODIC TIME Field
This field specifies period length. It is used by each type of timer configured for this
FCM. Valid entries are in the format:
hh:mm:ss
time in terms of hour, minute, and second (the data base holds the
number internally in seconds)
Counter FCM
This is a basic timer whose result is either in seconds or a specified time interval.
The Counter FCM has two inputs. One resets the count, the other enables or disables
3BUR002418-600 A
267
Delay Timer FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
counting. You can compare the count to two configured reference values, or you can
initialize the count to a configured value.
TIME UNITS (SECONDS) Field
This field provides a means to scale the result into the desired time units. The result
is usually calculated in seconds. If this is appropriate for the application, leave this
field at its default value, 1. If another time unit is required, enter the value in this
field. The internal result value (in milliseconds) is converted to seconds and then
divided by the entry to become the final result of the FCM. For example, to specify
minutes, enter 60. To specify hours, enter 3600. Valid entry is a decimal number
greater than 0.
LOWER TIME LIMIT Field
This field specifies a reference value that the count is compared to. When the count
is less than the value in this field, the data base flag TIM_EXP1 is 0. When the
count is greater than or equal to the value in this field, TIM_EXP1 is set to 1. Valid
entry is a decimal number greater than or equal to 0.
HIGHER TIME LIMIT Field
This field specifies a reference value that the count is compared to. When the count
is less than the value in this field, the data base flag TIM_EXP2 is 0. When the
count is greater than or equal to the value in this field, TIM_EXP2 is set to 1. When
TIM_EXP2 is 1, the count is frozen at its current value and does not increment on
subsequent loop scans. Valid entry is a decimal number greater than or equal to 0.
Delay Timer FCM
This is a delay timer whose result is ON or OFF. There is one input to the Delay
Timer FCM whose value is also ON or OFF. Two timers are present in the
algorithm. One is related to the time that the input is in the ON state. The other is
related to the time the input is in the OFF state.
268
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Logic Calculator FCMs
Logic Calculator FCMs
This section describes the active runtime fields on the following logic calculator
FCM templets. See Common Calculator FCM Fields on page 256 for common
fields.
•
Logical AND
•
Logical OR
•
Logical NOT
•
Exclusive OR
•
Set/Reset Flip-Flop
•
Real Compare (Signal Comparison)
Logical AND
The Logical AND FCM performs the AND function on up to 4 inputs.
LOGICAL/BITWISE Field
Logical
If all the defined inputs are not 0, Result = 1. If any of the defined
inputs is 0, Result = 0
BIT
Bits 1 of all inputs are ANDed together to get Bit 1 of the result.
Bits 2 are ANDed together, and so on. The result is a decimal
number equivalent to the bit pattern resulting from the ANDing.
Bits in the inputs are shifted to the right or left prior to ANDing.
The inputs for bitwise type of FCM are decimal numbers
translated into bit patterns by the FCM. For example, an input of 9
means that bits 0 and 4 are 1 and the rest of the bits are 0.
SHIFT COUNT 1 through 4 Fields
These fields specify how many places the input bits are shifted. SHIFT COUNT 1 is
for input 1, and so on. These fields are used when LOGICAL/BITWISE is
BITWISE. Valid entries are integer values between 0 and 16.
3BUR002418-600 A
269
Logical OR
Appendix A Runtime Templates
SHIFT DIRECTION 1 through 4 Fields
These fields specify whether input bits are shifted left or right, when
LOGICAL/BITWISE is BITWISE. Valid entries are:
RIGHT
shift input to right
LEFT
shift input to left
Logical OR
The Logical OR FCM performs the OR function on up to 4 inputs.
LOGICAL/BITWISE Field
Logical
If all the defined inputs are 0, Result = 0. If any of the defined
inputs is 1, Result = 1
BIT
Bits 1 of all inputs are ORed together to get Bit 1 of the result.
Bits 2 are ORed together, and so on. The result is a decimal
number equivalent to the bit pattern resulting from the ORing.
Bits in the inputs are shifted to the right or left prior to ORing.
The inputs for bitwise type of FCM are decimal numbers
translated into bit patterns by the FCM. For example, an input of 9
means that bits 0 and 4 are 1 and the rest of the bits are 0.
SHIFT COUNT 1 through 4 Fields
These fields specify how many places the input bits are shifted. SHIFT COUNT 1 is
for input 1, and so on. These fields are used when LOGICAL/BITWISE is
BITWISE. Valid entries are integer values between 0 and 16.
SHIFT DIRECTION 1 through 4 Fields
These fields specify whether input bits are shifted left or right, when
LOGICAL/BITWISE is BITWISE. Valid entries are:
270
RIGHT
shift input to right
LEFT
shift input to left
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Logical NOT
Logical NOT
The Logical NOT FCM performs the NOT function on its input.
LOGICAL/BITWISE Field
Logical
If inp = 0, Result = 1. If inp is not 0, Result = 0.
BIT
Individual bits of input are NOTed.
The inputs for bitwise type of FCM are decimal numbers
translated into bit patterns by the FCM. For example, an input of 9
means that bits 0 and 4 are 1 and the rest of the bits are 0.
Exclusive OR
The Exclusive OR FCM performs the exclusive OR function on two inputs.
LOGICAL/BITWISE Field
Logical
In logical mode, all non-zero inputs = 1. The result is determined
by the following truth table:
BIT
Inp1 Inp2
Result
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
Bits 1 of the inputs are exclusively ORed together to get Bit 1 of
the result, and so on.
Set/Reset Flip-Flop
The result of the Set/Reset Flip-Flop FCM is determined according to the following
truth table:
3BUR002418-600 A
Inp1
Inp2
Result
0
0
prev
271
Real Compare FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
where
prev is the value of the result from the previous sample period
any non-zero input is treated as a 1
As long as inp2 (Reset) is 0, the result goes to 1 as soon as inp1 (Set) goes to 1. The
result remains at 1 regardless of the subsequent state of inp1. When inp2 goes to 1,
the result is forced to 0, and remains there as long as inp2 is 1.
Real Compare FCM
This FCM compares two analog signals and provides a logical output if a specified
condition is met.
COMPENSATION CONSTANT Field
This field specifies the comparison constant, when INPUT SOURCE 2 is not
specified. Valid entry is any number.
COMPARE OPERATOR Field
This field specifies the operator for the comparison constant. Valid entries are:
EQ
equal to
NE
not equal to
GT
greater than
GE
greater than or equal to
LT
less than
LE
less than or equal to
NORMAL STATE Field
This field specifies the normal state of the FCM's result. Valid entries are: 0, 1
272
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Miscellaneous Calculator FCMs
Miscellaneous Calculator FCMs
This section describes the active runtime fields on the following miscellaneous
calculator FCM templets. See Common Calculator FCM Fields on page 256 for
common runtime fields.
•
Selector
•
Put Generic Value
•
Get Generic Value
•
Select Next
•
Redundant Signal Selector
•
Input Limiter
•
User Calculations
•
Data Entry
•
String
•
User Math Block
•
MOD30_MOD300_MAP
Selector FCM
The Selector FCM can compare up to four input signals and choose one of them for
the output.
SELECTOR MODE Field
This field configures the selector for serial, parallel or delta selection. Valid entries
are:
SERIAL
serial selection
PARALLEL parallel selection
DELTA
3BUR002418-600 A
delta selection
273
Put Generic Value FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
SELECT OP 1 through 3 Fields
These fields specify the type of comparisons used for the selections that the FCM
can make. SELECT OP 1 should always be defined. The other two SELECT OPs
are defined as needed. Valid entries are:
LOW
select low value
CENTER
select center value. For two inputs, the smaller value is chosen.
For four inputs, the second largest is chosen.
HIGH
select high value
MIN NUMBER OF INPUTS Field
This field specifies the minimum number of inputs with a GOOD data quality that
must be present if the FCM is to perform its algorithm. Valid entries are: 1, 2, 3, 4,
or ALL INPUTS.
Put Generic Value FCM
The Put Generic Value FCM writes its result to a user-specified destination
parameter in the Controller, Multibus I/O, Data Processor, or Interface Subsystem
containing the FCM. The result may come from either the INPUT SOURCE field or
the CONSTANT TO PUT field. There are two ways to specify location of the
destination parameter: OUTPUT DESTINATION or RELATION name. In most
cases OUTPUT DESTINATION is recommended.
CONSTANT TO PUT Field
This field specifies a constant to put to the destination parameter. This field is used
if no input source is defined in the INPUT SOURCE field. Valid entry is any
decimal number.
Get Generic Value FCM
The Get Generic Value FCM acquires the value of a user-specified source parameter
in the Controller, Multibus I/O, Data Processor, or Interface Subsystem containing
the FCM. You can also obtain the data quality of the source parameter. You can also
configure the FCM to acquire the current state of an alarm for a measured variable,
a setpoint, a deviation, an output, and so on.
274
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Get Generic Value FCM
ATTRIBUTE NAME Field
This field specifies the mnemonic of the source parameter. An entry must be made
to this field. Valid entry is a parameter mnemonic.
DATAQUAL ATTRIBUTE Field
This field specifies the parameter from which to obtain the data quality of the
parameter named in the ATTRIBUTE NAME field. When this parameter is obtained
it is stored in the data quality of the result parameter (DATAQUAL). Valid entry is a
parameter mnemonic.
ALARM CONDITION Field
This field is used to get the current status of an alarm for the parameter named in the
ATTRIBUTE NAME field. This field specifies the type of alarm to check. It must be
appropriate for the entry in the ATTRIBUTE NAME field. For example, the SETPT
HI entry for this field should only be used when the entry in the ATTRIBUTE
NAME field is a setpoint. You can check only one alarm for a variable. The alarm
status becomes the result of the Get FCM. Valid entries are:
NONE
do not obtain an alarm state
DQ BAD
measured variable bad data quality alarm
HIHI
measured variable high high alarm
HI
measured variable high alarm
LO
measured variable low alarm
LOLO
measured variable low low alarm
IROC HI
measured variable input rate of change alarm
OUT DQ B output bad data quality alarm
OUT HI
output high alarm
OUT LO
output low alarm
OUT IRC
output rate of change alarm
SETPT DQ setpoint bad data quality alarm
3BUR002418-600 A
275
Select Next
Appendix A Runtime Templates
SETPT HI setpoint high alarm
SETPT LO setpoint low alarm
DEV DQ BDdeviation bad data quality alarm
DEV HI
deviation high alarm
DEV LO
deviation low alarm
Select Next
This FCM compares two inputs and determines which FCM in the loop is processed
next.
COMPARISON CONSTANT Field
This field specifies the value for the comparison constant. Input 1 is compared to the
comparison constant if no entry is made to the INPUT SOURCE 2 field. Valid entry
is any number.
COMPARE OPERATOR Field
This field specifies the value for the comparison constant. Valid entries are:
EQ
equal to
NE
not equal to
GT
greater than
GE
greater than or equal to
LT
less than
LE
less than or equal to
Redundant Signal Selector
This FCM provides a backup signal from another source in the event that the
primary signal data quality goes BAD.
276
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Input Limiter FCM
Input Limiter FCM
The Input Limiter FCM defines analog input high and low limits. When the input
exceeds the high or low limit, the input value is clamped at the specified limit and a
flag is set. The input remains clamped as long as it exceeds the limit. The flag
remains set until the input crosses a configured deadband (below the high limit or
above the low limit). Even after the input returns within the boundaries of the high
and low limits and is no longer clamped, the flag remains set until the input crosses
the deadband. This prevents the flag from being continuously set and reset if the
input oscillates around one of the limits.
HI LIMIT Field
This field specifies the value of the high limit. Valid entry is any number greater
than the value of the low limit
LO LIMIT Field
This field specifies the value of the low limit. Valid entry is any number less than the
value of the high limit.
ENABLE HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies whether the high limit is enabled. Valid entries are:
NO
high limit is disabled
YES
high limit is enabled
ENABLE LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies whether the low limit is enabled. Valid entries are:
NO
low limit is disabled
YES
low limit is enabled.
User Calculations FCM
The User Calculations (UCAL) feature allows you to add user-defined algorithms to
CCF processing. This feature requires two main steps:
3BUR002418-600 A
277
Data Entry FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
•
A TCL program to execute the algorithm must be edited, compiled, and loaded.
•
A CCF loop with a UCAL FCM must be configured. When processed, the
UCAL FCM starts the TCL program and makes variables available to it. The
program can also pass variables back to the UCAL FCM.
Data Entry FCM
The Data Entry FCM allows you to store 20 decimal values in the data base for use
by other applications.
VALUE 1 through VALUE 20 Fields
These fields specify the decimal values that the FCM can hold. Valid entries are
decimal numbers. See the CCF User’s Guide for details.
String FCM
The String FCM is a user-defined string of up to 40 characters. The string is set
during configuration (not tuneable from the templet)
The string can be accessed by TCL programs via tag-FCM access (that is, $'tag''STR'.SVALUE). You can also use it on custom displays. The string can be accessed
even if the loop with the FCM is turned off. The result of the String FCM is a
numerical value not directly related to the string.
User Math Block FCM
The User Math Block FCM is used to create user-defined calculations for a
combination of input variables and constants. The FCM is part of a loop in the same
manner as other FCMs. When the FCM is executed, its calculation is a real number
that becomes the result of the FCM.
CONSTANTS K1 through K7 Fields
These fields are used to specify up to 7 constants: K1 through K7. You can view and
change K1 through K4 during runtime via the Loop/FCM Display. You can only
view K5 through K7, you cannot change them. Valid entry is a real number.
278
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
MOD30_MOD300_MAP
INITIAL RESULT Field
This field specifies an initial result for the FCM. It is available for the first scan of
the FCM. You can view and change the value during runtime via the Loop/FCM
Display. Valid entry is a real number.
HIGH LIMIT Field
This field specifies a high limit for the result of the FCM if the entry in the
ENABLE HIGH LIMIT field is YES. The limit applies to the final result only, not
intermediate calculations. When the result is limited, the HI_FLAG attribute is set to
1. TCL can set events to watch this flag or you can acquire its value using Get
FCMs. Valid entry is a real number.
LOW LIMIT Field
This field specifies a low limit for the result of the FCM if the entry in the ENABLE
LOW LIMIT field is YES. The limit applies to the final result only, not intermediate
calculations. When the result is limited, the LO_FLAG attribute is set to 1. TCL can
set events to watch this flag or you can acquire its value using Get FCMs. Valid
entry is a real number.
ENABLE HIGH LIMIT Field
This field enables and disables the high alarm limit checking. Valid entries are: YES
(enabled), NO (disabled).
ENABLE LOW LIMIT Field
This field enables and disables the low alarm limit checking. Valid entries are: YES
(enabled), NO (disabled).
MOD30_MOD300_MAP
This FCM is used when the MOD 300 control system communicates with a MOD
30 Instrument. This FCM is addressed in detail in instruction manual C120,
Taylor™ MOD 30™ Interface User’s Guide.
3BUR002418-600 A
279
Extended Processing FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Extended Processing FCM
The Extended Processing FCMs perform mathematical functions on data gathered
over an extended period of time. These FCMs provide information for historical,
long-range evaluation of a process, rather than for direct operational control.
This section describes the active runtime fields on the following extended
processing FCM templets. See below for common runtime fields.
•
Continuous Moving Average FCM
•
Standard Deviation FCM
•
Non-Rate Periodic Total FCM
•
Periodic Average FCM
•
Periodic Maximum FCM
•
Periodic Minimum FCM
•
Periodic Rate Total FCM
Common Fields
INITIAL MODE Field
This parameter specifies if the output mode of the FCM is set at MAN (manual) or
AUTO.
INITIAL OUTPUT Field
This parameter specifies the result of the FCM calculations and can be changed if
the output mode is manual. There are no state values nor state mnemonics available
for TCL for this parameter.
BAD INPUTS ACCEPTED? Field
This field specifies the data qualities acceptable for the input signal to the FCM and
the action to take if the data quality becomes unacceptable. Valid entries are:
YES
280
GOOD and BAD are acceptable data qualities
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
NO
Continuous Moving Average FCM
GOOD is the only acceptable data quality for the input
SAMPLE RATE Field
This field specifies the interval at which the FCM samples the input value. Valid
entry is in the form:
hh:mm:ss
the sample interval in hours, minutes, seconds
The SAMPLE RATE, PERIOD UNIT, and PERIOD SIZE fields must be configured
so the calculation is performed on no more than 127 samples.
PERIOD UNIT Field
This field specifies the time units for the period. It is used with the PERIOD SIZE
field to specify the period for the FCM. Section 10.4.7, Discussion, describes how
the period is used by periodic Extended Processing FCMs. Valid entries are:
MONTHLY, LAST DAY, WEEKLY, DAILY, HOURLY, MINUTES
PERIOD SIZE Field
This field specifies the size of the period. It is used with the PERIOD UNIT field to
specify the period of the FCM. Section 10.4.7, Discussion, describes how the period
is used by periodic Extended Processing FCMs. Valid entry is an integer from 1 to
99.
NUM OF INVALID SAMPLES Field
This field specifies the maximum number of samples with a BAD data quality that
can be present and still have output data quality GOOD. This field is not used when
the BAD INPUTS ACCEPTED? field is set to YES. Valid entry is an integer from 0
to 127.
Continuous Moving Average FCM
This module determines the moving average of an input over a specified number of
samples. The moving average is calculated in the standard mathematical fashion,
that is, when a new sample is added to the calculation, the oldest sample is
3BUR002418-600 A
281
Standard Deviation FCM
Appendix A Runtime Templates
discarded. The result is always available, even if too few samples have been taken to
make up the full complement specified at configuration.
MAX BAD SAMPLES Field
This field specifies the maximum number of bad samples allowable and present to
still perform the calculation. Valid entry is any integer from 0 to the value entered on
the NUMBER OF SAMPLES field.
Standard Deviation FCM
The Standard Deviation FCM calculates the standard deviation of the input value
over a specified time. The period is synchronized with the real time clock (minutes,
hours, and so on).
Non-Rate Periodic Total FCM
The Non-Rate Periodic Total FCM determines the total value of the input over a
specified time period. The time period is synchronized with the real time clock
(minutes, hours, and so on).
Periodic Average FCM
The Periodic Average FCM determines the arithmetic average of an input signal
over a selected time period. The time period is synchronized with the real time clock
(minutes, hours, shifts, and so on).
Periodic Maximum FCM
The Periodic Maximum FCM determines the maximum value of an input signal
over a specified time period. The period is synchronized with the real time clock
(minutes, hours, shifts, and so on).
Periodic Minimum FCM
The Periodic Minimum FCM determines the minimum value of an input signal over
a specified time period. The period is synchronized with the real time clock
(minutes, hours, and so on).
282
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Periodic Rate Total FCM
Periodic Rate Total FCM
The Periodic Rate Total FCM measures an integrated total for an input over a
specified time period. The time period is synchronized with the real time clock
(minutes, hours, and so on).
S800 I/O Runtime Templets
The S800 I/O runtime templets include:
•
Analog Input Modules: AI810, AI890 on page 283
•
Differential Analog Input Module: AI820 on page 286
•
RTD Input Module: AI830 on page 289
•
Thermocouple Input Module: AI835 on page 292
•
Analog Output Module: AO810, AO890 on page 295
•
Bipolar Analog Output Module: AO820 on page 298
•
Digital Input Modules, DI810 and DI890: DI810 on page 301
•
Digital Input Module for AC 400: DI814 on page 304
•
Digital Input Module: DI820 on page 305
•
Digital Input Module: DI821 on page 307
•
Digital Output Module: DO810 on page 309
•
Digital Output Module: DO814 on page 313
•
Digital Output Module: DO820 on page 315
AI810, AI890
S800 I/O Analog Input Module templets. The fields described for the AI810 templet are
also used for the AI890 except as noted in the field entry descriptions.
ACTIVE 01 through 08
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
3BUR002418-600 A
283
AI810, AI890
Appendix A Runtime Templates
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
DEAD BAND 01 through 08
Enter the difference in successive signal count values before a new value will be
sent.
The valid values are:
NONE, 0, 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023, 2047, 4095, 8191 and 16383.
The default value is NONE.
FILTER TIME 01 through 08
Enter the lowpass filter time constant (msec).
The possible range is:
20 to 65535.
The default value is 20 (20msec).
284
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
AI810, AI890
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the AI810 or AI890 Module of the station.
The name may contain up to 20 characters.
For the AI890 module, enter a description that includes the module type for
future reference to help alleviate confusion with an AI890 being used in the
AI810 templet.
LINEARIZATION 01 through 08
If the channel needs to apply the square-root-law linearization, enter a YES; if not
enter a NO.
The default is NO.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The first I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
If positions are to be used for spare MTUs, the spares must be in place so the rest
of the I/O modules are numbered correctly. The spare MTU will use a position
number when it is on the ModuleBus.
POWER LINE FREQUENCY
Enter the power line frequency to filter out (notch) the signal.
The valid values are:
16, 50, and 60.
The default value is 60.
RANGE 01 through 08
The valid values are:
0..10V (not valid for AI890)
0..20mA
3BUR002418-600 A
285
AI820
Appendix A Runtime Templates
The default range is 0..20mA.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 08
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES; if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
Used to select I/O module type:
Enter:
0 (zero) for the AI810 Module
274333696 for the AI890 Module
The default value is 0 (zero).
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the S800
I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
AI820
S800 I/O AI820 Differential Analog Input Module Templet.
ACTIVE 01 through 04
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
286
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
AI820
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
DEAD BAND 01 through 04
Enter the difference in successive signal count values before a new value will be
sent.
The valid values are:
NONE, 0, 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023, 2047, 4095, 8191 and 16383.
The default value is NONE.
FILTER TIME 01 through 04
Enter the lowpass filter time constant (msec) for each channel.
The possible range is:
20 to 65535.
The default value is 20 (20msec).
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the AI820 Module of the station. The name
may contain up to 20 characters.
LINEARIZATION 01 through 04
If a channel needs to apply the square-root-law linearization, enter a YES;
if not enter a NO.
3BUR002418-600 A
287
AI820
Appendix A Runtime Templates
The default is NO.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
If positions are to be used for spare MTUs, the spares must be in place so the rest
of the I/O modules are numbered correctly. The spare MTU will use a position
number when it is on the ModuleBus.
POWER LINE FREQUENCY
Enter the power line frequency to filter out (notch) the signal.
The valid values are:
16, 50, and 60.
The default value is 60.
RANGE 01 through 04
The valid values are:
-10..10V
-20..20mA
-5..5V
The default range is -20..20mA.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 04
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES; if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
This field reserved for future use. A zero (0) should be entered as a default value.
288
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
AI830
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the S800
I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
AI830
S800 I/O AI830 RTD Input Module Templet.
ACTIVE 01 through 08
If the channel is to be active enter a YES. If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
DEAD BAND 01 through 08
Enter the difference in successive signal count values before a new value will be
sent.
The valid values are:
NONE, 0, 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023, 2047, 4095, 8191 and 16383.
The default value is NONE.
3BUR002418-600 A
289
AI830
Appendix A Runtime Templates
FILTER 01 through 08
Enter the lowpass filter time constant (in 10msec units) for each channel. Filter
times shorter than the update time are not usable. Update time can be calculated as:
TUpdate = 160ms + (n * 80ms) n = number of active channels 1...8
Therefore the TUpdate Range = 240ms to 800ms
The default value is 10 (100msec).
The possible range is:
10 to 65535.
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the AI830 Module of the station. The name
may contain up to 20 characters.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
If positions are to be used for spare MTUs, the spares must be in place so the rest
of the I/O modules are numbered correctly. The spare MTU will use a position
number when it is on the ModuleBus.
POWER LINE FREQUENCY
Enter the power line frequency to filter out (notch) the signal.
The valid values are:
16, 50, and 60.
The default value is 60.
RANGE 01 through 08
The possible ranges are:
-80..80 C, -112..176 F
290
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
AI830
-200..250 C, -328..482 F
-200..850 C, -328..1562 F
-60..180 C, -76..356 F
-80..260 C, -112..500 F
-100..260 C, -148..500 F
0..400 OHMS.
The default range is -328..1562 F.
When the user saves the templet, the sensor type is used to determine if the user
entered a correct range option. If the user did not enter a correct range option, an
error message is generated and a default correct range option provided. The
following are the correct range options and defaults for each sensor type:
Pt100 => -80..80 C, -112..176 F, -200..250 C, -328..482 F, -200..850 C, 328..1562 F (corrected default)
Ni100 => -60..180 C, -76..356 F (corrected default)
Ni120 => -80..260 C, -112..500 F (corrected default)
Cu10 => -100..260 C, -148..500 F (corrected default)
Resistor => 0..400 OHMS (corrected default).
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 08
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES; if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
This field reserved for future use. A zero (0) should be entered as a default value.
SENSOR TYPE 01 through 08
Enter the type of sensor that will be connected to each channel.
The valid values are:
PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10 and RESISTOR
The default entry is PT100.
3BUR002418-600 A
291
AI835
Appendix A Runtime Templates
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the S800
I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
AI835
S800 I/O AI835 Thermocouple Input Module Templet.
ACTIVE 01 through 08
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
DEAD BAND 01 through 08
Enter the difference in successive signal count values before a new value will be
sent.
The valid values are:
NONE, 0, 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023, 2047, 4095, 8191 and 16383.
292
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
AI835
The default value is NONE.
FILTER 01 through 08
Enter the lowpass filter time constant (in 10msec units) for each channel. Filter
times shorter than the update time are not usable. Update time can be calculated as:
TUpdate = 160ms + (n * 80ms) n = number of active channels 1...8
Therefore the TUpdate Range = 240ms to 800ms
The possible range is:
10 to 65535.
The default value is 10 (100msec).
JUNCTION COMP 01 through 08
Enter if the junction compensation will be from an entered fixed value or from the
Cold Junction Compensation channel. If channel 08 will be used as the Cold
Junction Compensation value, enter COLD for channels 01 through 07, and for
channel 08 also enter COLD. If the junction compensation will use the value
entered in the JUNCTION TEMP field, enter FIXED.
The valid values are:
COLD or FIXED
The default entry is COLD.
JUNCTION TEMPERATURE
Enter the fixed temperature at the junction of the thermocouple wire and the
terminals of the MTU.
Enter the estimated temperature at the MTU terminals if Cold Junction
Compensation will not be used by any one or all channels. If Cold Junction
Compensation will be used by all channels (01 to 07), then this field entry does not
need a value, leave it at the default of 0.
The possible entries are:
If the entry of the TEMP UNIT = C: -40...100
If the entry of the TEMP UNIT = F: -40...212
3BUR002418-600 A
293
AI835
Appendix A Runtime Templates
The default entry is 0 (zero)
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the AI835 Module of the station. The name
may contain up to 20 characters.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
If positions are to be used for spare MTUs, the spares must be in place so the rest
of the I/O modules are numbered correctly. The spare MTU will use a position
number when it is on the ModuleBus.
POWER LINE FREQUENCY
Enter the power line frequency to filter out (notch) the signal.
The valid values are:
16, 50, and 60.
The default value is 60.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 08
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES; if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
This field reserved for future use. A zero (0) should be entered as a default value.
TC TYPE 01 through 08
Enter the type of sensor that will be connected to each channel. When channel 08
serves as the Cold Junction Compensation value, enter the sensor type, normally
294
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
AO810, AO890
PT100, that will be connected to channel 8. The type LINEAR is used if the input is
a -25mV to 75mV signal.
The valid values are:
B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, PT100 and LINEAR
The default entry is J.
TEMPERATURE UNIT
Enter the temperature’s unit of measure; either Centigrade or Fahrenheit.
The valid values are:
C and F
The default value is C.
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the S800
I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
AO810, AO890
The S800 I/O AO810 Analog Output Module templet is also used for the AO890
except as noted in the field entry descriptions.
ACTIVE 01 through 08
If the channel is to be active enter a YES. If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
3BUR002418-600 A
295
AO810, AO890
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
DQ CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel data quality update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the
S800 I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, and 4096
The default value is 128.
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the AO810 or AO890 Module of the station.
The name may contain up to 20 characters.
For the AO890 module, enter a description that includes the module type for
future reference to help alleviate confusion with an AO890 being used in the
AO810 templet.
OSP HOLD 01 through 08
If an OSP TIMEOUT has occurred, will the AO810 hold the last value during OSP?
Enter a YES if it will, or enter a NO if an OSP VALUE will be used.
The Default is NO.
OSP TIMEOUT
Enter the time (msec) after communications is lost, that outputs go to OSP value.
The valid values are:
OFF, 256, 512, and 1024.
296
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
AO810, AO890
The default value is 1024.
OSP VALUE 01 through 08
Enter the channel value in counts to output after an OSP TIMEOUT. If the OSP
HOLD has been selected as the OSP value then this field entry is ignored.
The valid values are:
0 to 28480.
Where 0 = 0 mA and 28480 = 20 mA (Counts per mA = 1424)
The default is 0.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
If positions are to be used for spare MTUs, the spares must be in place so the rest
of the I/O modules are numbered correctly. The spare MTU will use a position
number when it is on the ModuleBus.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 08
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES; if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
Used to select I/O module type:
Enter:
0 (zero) for the AO810 Module
274333696 for the AO890 Module
The default value is 0 (zero).
3BUR002418-600 A
297
AO820
Appendix A Runtime Templates
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the S800
I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
AO820
The S800 I/O AO820 Bipolar Analog Output Module templet.
ACTIVE 01 through 04
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
DQ CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel data quality update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to S800
I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, and 4096
298
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
AO820
The default value is 128.
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the AO820 Module of the station. The name
may contain up to 20 characters.
OSP HOLD 01 through 04
If an OSP TIMEOUT has occurred, will the AO810 hold the last value during OSP?
Enter a YES if it will, or enter a NO if an OSP VALUE will be used.
The Default is NO.
OSP TIMEOUT
Enter the time (msec) after communications is lost, that outputs go to OSP value.
The valid values are:
OFF, 256, 512, and 1024.
The default value is 1024.
OSP VALUE 01 through 04
Enter the channel value in counts to output after an OSP TIMEOUT. If the OSP
HOLD has been selected as the OSP value then this field entry is ignored.
The default is 0.
The valid values are:
0 to 28480.
Where 0 = 0 mA and 28480 = 20 mA.
Output
Range
Minimum
Count
Maximum
Count
Counts
-10 - 10V
-28480
28480
2848 V/count
-20 - 20MA
-28480
28480
1424 mA/count
3BUR002418-600 A
299
AO820
Appendix A Runtime Templates
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
If positions are to be used for spare MTUs, the spares must be in place so the rest
of the I/O modules are numbered correctly. The spare MTU will use a position
number when it is on the ModuleBus.
RANGE 01 through 04
Enter the output range (voltage or current) desired.
The valid values are:
-10..10V
-20..20MA
The default value is -20..20MA
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 04
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES; if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
This field reserved for future use. A zero (0) should be entered as a default value.
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the S800
I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
300
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DI810
DI810
The DI810 templet is also used for the DI890 except as noted in the field entry
descriptions. The DI890 also supports only 8 channels.
ACTIVE 01 through 16
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
FILTER
Enter the input filter time in msec.
The valid values are:
2, 4, 8 and 16.
The default value is 2.
3BUR002418-600 A
301
DI810
Appendix A Runtime Templates
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the DI810 or DI890 Module of the station.
The name may contain up to 20 characters.
For the DI890 module, enter a description that includes the module type for
future reference to help alleviate confusion with an DI890 being used in the
DI810 templet.
MONITOR POWER
To monitor process power source enter a YES; if not needed enter a NO.
DI890 with any channel supervision requires that MONITOR POWER = YES.
Default Value is NO.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 16
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES;
if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
Used to select I/O module type:
Enter:
0 (zero) for the DI810 Module.
542769152 for the DI890 Module (decimal value for all channels without
supervision) see table below where a “1” sets supervision for channels 8 - 1.
302
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DI810
The default value is 0 (zero).
Examples from above:
All with No Supervision
hex number = 205A0000
converted to decimal = 542769152
All with Supervision
hex number = 205A00FF
converted to decimal = 542769407
Channels 4 through 1 with Supervision
hex number = 205A000F
converted to decimal = 542769167
Channels 8 through 5 with Supervision
hex number = 205A00F0
converted to decimal = 542769392
Channels 7, 2 and 1 with Supervision
hex number = 205A0043
converted to decimal = 542769219
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to S800 I/O
User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
3BUR002418-600 A
303
DI814
Appendix A Runtime Templates
The default value is 128.
DI814
The DI814 templet on an AC 400 Series controller.
ACTIVE 01 through 16
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
FILTER
Enter the input filter time in msec.
The valid values are:
2, 4, 8 and 16.
The default value is 2.
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the DI814 Module of the station. The name
may contain up to 20 characters.
304
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DI820
MONITOR POWER
To monitor process power source enter a YES;
if not needed enter a NO.
Default Value is NO.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 16
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES;
if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
This field reserved for future use. A zero (0) should be entered as a default value.
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to S800 I/O
User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
DI820
ACTIVE 01 through 08
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
3BUR002418-600 A
305
DI820
Appendix A Runtime Templates
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
FILTER
Enter the input filter time in msec.
The valid values are:
2, 4, 8 and 16.
The default value is 2.
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the DI820 Module of the station. The name
may contain up to 20 characters.
MONITOR POWER
To monitor process power source enter a YES;
if not needed enter a NO.
Default Value is NO.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
306
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DI821
Default value is 1.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 08
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES;
if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
This field reserved for future use. A zero (0) should be entered as a default value.
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to S800 I/O
User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
DI821
ACTIVE 01 through 08
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
3BUR002418-600 A
307
DI821
Appendix A Runtime Templates
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
FILTER
Enter the input filter time in msec.
The valid values are:
2, 4, 8 and 16.
The default value is 2.
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the DI821 Module of the station. The name
may contain up to 20 characters.
MONITOR POWER
To monitor process power source enter a YES;
if not needed enter a NO.
Default Value is NO.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 08
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES;
if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
308
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DO810
RESERVED OPTIONS
This field reserved for future use. A zero (0) should be entered as a default value.
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to S800 I/O
User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
DO810
The DO810 templet is also used for the DO890 except as noted in the field entry
descriptions. The DO890 also supports only 4 channels.
ACTIVE 01 through 16
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
3BUR002418-600 A
309
DO810
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DQ CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel data quality update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the
S800 I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, and 4096
The default value is 128.
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the DO810 or DO890 Module of the station.
The name may contain up to 20 characters.
For the DO890 module, enter a description that includes the module type for
future reference to help alleviate confusion with an DO890 being used in the
DO810 templet.
MONITOR POWER
To monitor process power source enter a YES; if not needed enter a NO.
DO890 with any channel supervision requires that MONITOR POWER = YES.
Default Value is NO.
OSP HOLD 01 through 16
If an OSP TIMEOUT has occurred, will the DO810 hold the last value during OSP?
Enter a YES if it will, or enter a NO if an OSP VALUE will be used.
The Default is NO.
OSP TIMEOUT
Enter the time (msec) after communications is lost, that outputs go to OSP value.
The valid values are:
OFF, 256, 512, and 1024.
The default value is 1024.
310
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DO810
OSP VALUE 01 through 16
Enter the channel value (0 or 1) to output after an OSP TIMEOUT. If the OSP
HOLD has been selected as the OSP value then this field entry is ignored.
The valid values are:
0 or 1.
Where 0 = off and 1 = on.
The default is 0.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 16
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES;
if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
Used to select I/O module type:
Enter:
0 (zero) for the DO810 Module
542769152 for the DO890 Module (decimal value for all channels without
supervision) see table below where a “1” sets supervision for channels 4 - 1.
3BUR002418-600 A
311
DO810
Appendix A Runtime Templates
The default value is 0 (zero).
Examples from above:
All with No Supervision
hex number = 205A0000
converted to decimal = 542769152
All with Supervision
hex number = 205A000F
converted to decimal = 542769167
Channels 4 and 1 with Supervision
hex number = 205A0009
converted to decimal = 542769161
Channels 3 and 2 with Supervision
hex number = 205A0006
converted to decimal = 542769158
Channels 2 and 1 with Supervision
hex number = 205A0003
converted to decimal = 542769155
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to S800 I/O
User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
312
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DO814
The default value is 128.
DO814
ACTIVE 01 through 16
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
Default value is 0.
DQ CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel data quality update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the
S800 I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, and 4096
The default value is 128.
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the DO814 Module of the station. The name
may contain up to 20 characters.
3BUR002418-600 A
313
DO814
Appendix A Runtime Templates
MONITOR POWER
To monitor process power source enter a YES; if not needed enter a NO.
Default Value is NO.
OSP HOLD 01 through 16
If an OSP TIMEOUT has occurred, will the DO814 hold the last value during OSP?
Enter a YES if it will, or enter a NO if an OSP VALUE will be used.
The Default is NO.
OSP TIMEOUT
Enter the time (msec) after communications is lost, that outputs go to OSP value.
The valid values are:
OFF, 256, 512, and 1024.
The default value is 1024.
OSP VALUE 01 through 16
Enter the channel value (0 or 1) to output after an OSP TIMEOUT. If the OSP
HOLD has been selected as the OSP value then this field entry is ignored.
The valid values are:
0 or 1.
Where 0 = off and 1 = on.
The default is 0.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
314
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DO820
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 16
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES;
if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
This field reserved for future use. A zero (0) should be entered as a default value.
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to S800 I/O
User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
DO820
ACTIVE 01 through 08
If the channel is to be active enter a YES.
If the channel will not be used enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
AUTO DOWNLOAD
To automatically download the configuration to the I/O module enter a YES. In the
future, if the configuration is to be loaded locally enter a NO.
Default value is YES.
CLUSTER
Enter the I/O device cluster of the station where this module is located. The cluster
connected directly to the FCI is number zero (0). The number in this field is 0 -7.
3BUR002418-600 A
315
DO820
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Default value is 0.
DQ CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel data quality update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to the
S800 I/O User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, and 4096
The default value is 128.
LABEL
Enter a characteristic name to identify the DO820 Module of the station. The name
may contain up to 20 characters.
MONITOR POWER
To monitor process power source enter a YES;
if not needed enter a NO.
Default Value is NO.
OSP HOLD 01 through 08
If an OSP TIMEOUT has occurred, will the DO820 hold the last value during OSP?
Enter a YES if it will, or enter a NO if an OSP VALUE will be used.
The Default is NO.
OSP TIMEOUT
Enter the time (msec) after communications is lost, that outputs go to OSP value.
The valid values are:
OFF, 256, 512, and 1024.
The default value is 1024.
316
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
DO820
OSP VALUE 01 through 08
Enter the channel value (0 or 1) to output after an OSP TIMEOUT. If the OSP
HOLD has been selected as the OSP value then this field entry is ignored.
The valid values are:
0 or 1.
Where 0 = off and 1 = on.
The default is 0.
POSITION
Enter a number from 1 to 12 representing the position of the I/O module relative to
the FCI. The I/O module directly next to the FCI is number 1.
Default value is 1.
REPORT FAULTS 01 through 08
If channel faults are to be reported, enter a YES;
if not enter a NO.
The default value is YES.
RESERVED OPTIONS
This field reserved for future use. A zero (0) should be entered as a default value.
VALUE CYCLE TIME
Enter the channel value update period (msec) over the fieldbus. Refer to S800 I/O
User’s Guide for details of AF 100 loading in relation to cycle time.
The valid values are:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096.
The default value is 128.
3BUR002418-600 A
317
Special Applications Runtime Templets
Appendix A Runtime Templates
Special Applications Runtime Templets
The runtime templets for these FCMs are implemented only in systems having
special applications software installed.
SP_ALGO1_FCM
The runtime templet for this FCM is implemented only in systems having special
application software installed.
SP_ALGO2_FCM
The runtime templet for this FCM is implemented only in systems having special
application software installed.
SP_ALGO3_FCM
The runtime templet for this FCM is implemented only in systems having special
application software installed.
SP_ALGO4_FCM
The runtime templet for this FCM is implemented only in systems having special
application software installed.
SP_ALGO5_FCM
The runtime templet for this FCM is implemented only in systems having special
application software installed.
318
3BUR002418-600 A
Appendix A Runtime Templates
BRKPTS
BRKPTS
The Breakpoint Sets (BRKPTS) object is a child of CCF object. One BRKPTS
object is required for each breakpoint set being defined for the system. See Runtime
Version of Breakpoint Sets Templet on page 57.
NAME OF SET
The NAME OF SET field specifies the name of the linearization table used when
referencing the breakpoint set.
Valid entry is a string of up to 4 ASCII characters.
Default is: blank spaces
X VALUE
The X VALUE field specifies the x value for one of up to 11 x, y pairs for the
breakpoint table.
Valid entry is a floating point number.
Y VALUE
The Y VALUE field specifies the y value for one of up to 11 x, y pairs for the
breakpoint table.
Valid entry is a floating point number.
3BUR002418-600 A
319
BRKPTS
320
Appendix A Runtime Templates
3BUR002418-600 A
Revision History
The following table lists the revision history of this User Manual.
Revision
Index
Description
Date
-
First version published for 800xA 6.0
August 2014
A
Updated for 800xA 6.0.3
September 2016
Updates in Revision Index A
The following table shows the updates made in this User Manual for 800xA 6.0.3.
Updated Section/Sub-section
Section 4 TCL Displays
3BUR002418-600 A
Description of Update
TCL / Unit Message Display subsection updated with
Acknowledge and Message.
321
Updates in Revision Index A
322
3BUR002418-600 A
Index
A
Abnormal State 39, 45, 211
Abnormal State Change 59
About 23
AC410 Subsystem Status Display 130
AC460 Subsystem Status Display 125
Acknowledge 61, 209 to 210
Adaptive Mode 51
Address (Device Number) 123
AdvaBuild 17
Advant OCS 17
AF100 Interface Status Area 149
AF100 Interface Status Menu 150
AI810 283
AI820 286
AI830 289
AI835 292
AI890 283, 285
Alarm
Acknowledgement 61
Check 58
Checking 52
Detection 59
Indication 59
Indications 40
Limit Parameters 52
Limits 60
Post 32, 58
Posting 52
Priority 60
Alarm Acknowledge 209 to 210
Alarm Buttons 45
Alarm Check 32, 36
Alarm Configuration 32, 36
Alarm Post 36
3BUR002418-600 A
Analog Input 286
Analog Output 298
Analog output 295
AO810 templet 295
AO820 298
AO890 295 to 296
Archive Messages 141
Area Alarm Display, CCF 71
Area Graphic Display, CCF 72
Area Status Display, CCF 69
Aspect Browser 25
Auto Expand Trend Y-Axis 48
Auto/Manual Transfer, Transfer, Auto/Manual 201
Automatic Mode 43
Automatic Reset Balancing 202
B
Balance Mode 238
Base Gain 231
Base Rate 52
Base Reset 232
BASERATE 214
Baserate 146
Bias 44
Bias Mode 238
Bipolar Analog Output 298
Bit Pattern, TLL File 117
Breakpoint Sets Templet 55, 260 to 319
NAME OF SET field 319
X VALUE field 319
Y VALUE field 319
BRKPTS, Breakpoint Sets Templet 319
Browser, Aspect 25
Bumpless Transfer, Setpoint 198
323
Index
C
Cascade Control System 205
CCF 17
CCF Load 145
CCF Runtime Displays 31
Change User 24
CI520/CI522 Submodule Status 148
CI541 Submodule Status 168
CI810A FCI 154
CI820 FCIs 154
Cluster, S800 I/O 152
Comp Mode Restrict 219
Computer Mode 43, 64, 67
Configurable Control Functions (CCF) 31
Confirm, Faceplate Button 42
Continuous Loops 38
Control Action Type, Integral 232
Control Limit Parameters 52
Control Output Tracking 44
Control Packages Overview 25
Control Structure 194
Controller Action 232
Controller Subsystem Status Display 131, 190
Counter Display, TLL 110
CPU Load 145
Cutout State 216
D
Data Entry FCM 146, 278
Database Summary Displays, TLL 119
DCN 17
Deviation
Bad Quality 52
Control Limit 52
Deadband 32, 53
Device
Alarms 59
Loop Faceplate 37 to 38
Loops 36
Number (Address) 123
324
Parameter 53
Device Descriptor State 37
Device Loop Templet 221
DI810 301
DI814 templet 304
DI890 301
Diagnostic (Status) Displays 121
Diagnostic Message List 121
Differential Analog Input 286
Direct I/O Display 190
Display Access 25
Display Request 179
Display Request Button 132
Displays, CCF 31
Area Alarm 71
Area Graphic 72
Area Status 69
Device Faceplate 37 to 38
Group Alarm 69
Group Graphic 68
Group Status 62
Group Trend 66
Loop Detail 32
Loop Faceplate 34 to 35, 39
Loop FCM 45, 53
Displays, Diagnostic
AC410 Subsystem Status 130
AC460 Subsystem Status 125
Controller Subsystem Status 131, 190
Diagnostic Messages 140
System Performance 145
System Status 122
Turbo Node Subsystem Status 137
Turbo/Console Node Subsystem Status 137
Displays, I/O
Direct I/O 190
PROFIBUS Device 171
PROFIBUS LAN 168
PROFIBUS Module/Channel 176
S100 Device Status 163
3BUR002418-600 A
Index
S100 LAN 161
S800 Device 156
S800 LAN 148
S800 Station 152
TRIO Block 185
TRIO LAN 180
Displays, Overview (Graphic) 26
Displays, TCL 75
Message 77
Recipe Detail 97
Sequence Debug 91
Sequence Detail 84
SFC 86
Unit Detail 80
Unit Overview 78
Displays, TLL 103
Counter 110
Database Summary 119
File 117
I/O Point 115
Register 108
Segment 103
Sequencer 118
Timer 112
Displays, Tuning
Linearization Update 55, 57
Loop FCM 55
DO810 templet 309
DO890 309
E
Enable Access Restriction 37
Enable Posting 215
Eng Deadband 53
Engineering Deadband 32
Error Squared Option 235
F
Faceplate
A/M Ratio/Bias Loop 35
3BUR002418-600 A
Alarm Indications 40
Continuous Loop 39
Device Loop 37 to 38
Operator Controls 42
PID Loop 34
Process Bargraphs and Values 40
Reduced Size 33
Tag Identification 39
TLL Counter 111
TLL I/O Point 116
TLL Program Elements 106
TLL Register 109
TLL Timer 114
Tool Tips 45
FCI Module 152
FCI Status 154
FCM 17
Loop Display 45
Mode Status 54
Output Mode Status 54
Setpoint Mode Status 54
Setpoint Value 54
FCM TMPL (FCM Templet) Button 46, 55
FeedBack 44
FeedForward 44
Feedforward Control 199
FeedForward-FeedBack 44
FF/FB Mode 235
Field State 36, 53
File Display, TLL 117
Filled Plot 98
Find, Sequence Debug 92 to 93
G
Gain 32, 51, 231
Gain Limit 235
Goto, Sequence Debug 92 to 93
Group Alarm Display, CCF 69
Group Graphic Display, CCF 68
Group Status Display, CCF 62
325
Index
Group Trend Display, CCF 66
H
Hard Reset 125
Help 20
Hybrid Line Array 98
Hybrid Plot 98
I
I/O Point Display, TLL 115
Illegal State or Command 59
Inc Minimum Output 240
Infinite Values 40
Input
Bad Quality 52
Hi Alarm Limit 52
HiHi Alarm Limit 52
Lo Alarm Limit 52
LoLo Alarm Limit 52
Rate of Change Alarm Limit 52
Integral Control Action 232
Integral Type 232
Interactive Form 235
L
Limit Parameters
Alarm 52, 60
Control 52
Limiting 60
Linear Table 55
Linearization Update Display 55
Link Time-out 238
Local Mode 43
Lock State 36, 53
Log Over 24
Logon Name and Password 24
Loop Definition Templet 55, 213
Abnormal State 219
Bad Alarm Priority 217
Bad Measure Alarms? 217
326
Comp Mode Restrict 219
Cutout State 216
Dmnd Processing Mode 220
Enable Hi Alarms? 216
Enable Hihi Alarms? 218
Enable Lo Alarms? 216
Enable Lolo Alarms? 218
Enable Posting 215
Enable Rate Alarms? 217
Engu Alarm Deadband 218
Hi Eng. Unit Limit 215
Hi Limit 216
High Alarm Priority 216
Hihi Alarm Priority 218
Hihi Limit 218
Lo Alarm Priority 217
Lo Eng. Unit Limit 215
Lo Limit 216
Lolo Alarm Priority 219
Lolo Limit 219
Loop Descriptor 213, 221
Loop State 215
Loops To Process Edit Window 220
Measurement Units 215
Processing Phase 214
Processing Rate 214
Rate Alarm Priority 217
Rate Limit 217
Suppress Alarms 215
Trend Rate 214
Unit ID 219
Loop Descriptor 213, 221
Loop Detail Display 194
Continuous Loops 32
Device Loop 36
Tuning Parameters 32
Loop Detail Display, CCF 32
Loop Faceplate, CCF 34 to 35, 39
Loop FCM Display 45, 53, 194
Loop FCM Templet 55
3BUR002418-600 A
Index
Loop Mode 32, 36, 52
Loop Parameter 52
Loop Setup 32, 36
Loop State 215
LOOP TMPL (Loop Definition Templet) 46, 55
Loop Tuning 32
Loop, Control 49
Loop, Tuning 51
M
Manual Enable 37
Manual Mode 43
Manual Reset 202
Manual Reset Mode 234
Master Controller 205
Measured Variable Alarm Limit 52
Measurement Units 215
Memory Utilization 146
Message Display, Diagnostic 140
Message Display, TCL 77
Messages, Archive 141
Microscan Algorithm 232
MOD 300 Objects 27
Tracking 44
Value 33, 45
Output Tracking 202
Override Mode 36, 53
Overview Type Displays 26
P
Page Selector Alarm Panel 26
Phase 32, 36, 52
Plant Explorer 23
Plot Display, TCL Array 98
Plot, Filled 98
Preact 32, 51
Preact Time 232
Print Active Window 30
Print Diagnostic Messages 144
Print to file 144
Process Bargraphs and Values 40
Processing Phase 146, 214
Processing Rate 52, 146, 214, 231
PROFIBUS Device Display 171
PROFIBUS LAN Display 168
PROFIBUS Module/Channel Display 176
Proportional Response 231
N
NAME OF SET field
Breakpoint Sets Templet 319
O
Object Browser 194
Objects, MOD 300 27
On-Line Help 20
Operator Controls 42
Operator Workplace 23
Output 64, 67
Bad Quality 52
Control Limit 52
Deadband 32, 53
Mode 54
Rate of Change Alarm Limit 52
3BUR002418-600 A
Q
Quality Parameters
DeviationBad 52
InputBad 52
OutputBad 52
SetpointBad 52
R
Ramp 45
Ratio 44
Ratio Mode 239
Ratio Or Bias Balancing 202
Recipe
Changing Values 98
Detail Display, TCL 97
327
Index
Loading 82
Reduced Faceplates 33
Redundancy Commands, TRIO 182
Redundancy Request 131
Redundancy Status, AF 100 149
Redundancy Status, TRIO LAN 182
Redundant Device, S100 161
Refresh Rate, Trend 47
Register Display, TLL 108
Remote Mode 43
Reset 32, 51, 232
Reset CCF 146
Reset CPU 146
Reset for Upgrade 125
Restore Trace (TCL Array Plot) 100
Restricted Parameters (Computer Mode) 43
Revert User 24
RTD Input 289
Ruler (TCL Array Plot) 100
Rungs, Segment display 104
S
S100 Device Status Display 163
S100 LAN Display 161
S100 Smoothstart Start-up Sequence 165
S100 Warmstart 165
S800 Device Display 156
S800 LAN Display 148
S800 Station Display 152
Scan Rate 32, 36, 52, 214, 221
Screen Dump 144
Security Level 24
Segment Display, TLL 103
Sequence
Debug 91
Loading onto a Unit 81
Mode 83
Removing 83
State 82
Status 83
328
Steps 85
Sequence Debug Display
Breakpoint 95
Trace 93
Sequence Debug Display, TCL 91
Sequence Detail Display, TCL 84
Sequence List 85, 92, 118
Sequence Source 92
Sequencer Display, TLL 118
Server Status 29
Setpoint 64, 67
Bad Quality 52
Hi Control Limit 52
Lo Control Limit 52
Mode 54
Tracking Mode 44
Setpoint Value 33, 45, 54
SFC (Sequential Function Chart) Display 86
Simulation Mode 36, 53
Slave Controller 205
State Alarm 59
State Definitions, System 124
States, FCM Status 54
Status Displays 121
Subsystem Name 123
Subsystem Status 123
Suppress Alarms 215
Switch Bus 182, 184
Switchover 125
System Performance Display 145
System Status Display 122
T
Tag
Descriptor 39
Identification 39
Name 39
Taylor Control Language (TCL) Displays 75
Taylor Ladder Logic 103
TCL Array Plot Symbol 98
3BUR002418-600 A
Index
TCL Editor 76
TCL Message Display 77
TCL Recipe Editor 76
TCL Reply 77
TCL Sequences 76
TCL Version Mismatch 76
Templet
Breakpoint Sets 319
Templets
Device Loop 57, 221
FCM 31
Loop Definition 31
Thermocouple Input 292
Timeout 59
Timer Display, TLL 112
TLL 103
Device 105
I/O Point Faceplate 106
Load Segment 105
Remove Segment 105
Tool Tips, Faceplate 45
Trace Steps 93
Trace Variables 93
Trace Visibility, (CCF) Trend 47
Transition (Unknown State or Timeout) 59
Trend
Auto Expand Y-Axis 48
Data Source 47
Modifying Y-axis 47
Refresh Rate 32, 47
Ruler Dialog 48
Trace Visibility 47
Use Output Limits for Y-Axis 48
Trend Rate 32, 52, 64, 214
TRIO Block Display 185
TRIO LAN Display 180
Tuning
Breakpoint Sets Templet 57
Changing Parameter 51
FCM Templet 53, 56
3BUR002418-600 A
Loop Definition Templet 53, 56
Loop Detail Display 51
Loop FCM Display 51, 53
Parameters 32
Turbo Node Subsystem Status Display 137
Turbo/Console Node Subsystem Status
Display 137
U
Unacknowledged Alarm 40, 59
Unit Detail Display, TCL 80
Unit Overview Display, TCL 78
Unknown State 59
Use Output Limits Y-Axis 48
User
Logon 24
Manager 24
Rights 24
W
Workplace Login 23
X
X VALUE field
Breakpoint Sets Templet 319
Y
Y VALUE field
Breakpoint Sets Templet 319
329
Index
330
3BUR002418-600 A
www.abb.com/800xA
www.abb.com/controlsystems
Copyright© 2016 ABB.
All rights reserved.
Power and productivity
for a better worldTM
3BUR002418-600 A
Contact us
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement